home *** CD-ROM | disk | FTP | other *** search
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1. Preface ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- This manual describes the features of EPM. It is intended for the user who is
- new to EPM. However, it is not meant to be a tutorial; it is assumed that the
- user has had some experience with other editors. The information on how to use
- the editor, therefore, is presented here in a reference or summary manner.
- Tables and lists summarize key functions and commands. If you cannot find what
- you are looking for, refer to the index for cross referencing.
-
- EPM is programmable. Although a discussion of superficial tailoring is
- presented herein, the macro language (the E language) which allows the editor's
- programmability is not discussed in this manual at all. For information on the
- E language, users should refer to The EPM Editor Technical Reference.
-
- Note: EPM will be used as an abbreviation for the Enhanced Editor throughout
- this document.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.1. Related Manuals ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- The following manual contains information related to the E editor:
-
- o The EPM Editor Technical Reference Manual
- o Rexx Information in OS/2 2.0 Information
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.2. Special Notices ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- The term OS/2 is a trademark of the IBM Corporation.
-
- The term Unix is a registered trademark of the American Telephone and Telegraph
- Company.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2. Getting Started ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Basic information on the use of EPM.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.1. Installation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- The details of the installation procedure vary, depending on how you got EPM,
- but the basic concept remains the same.
-
- IBM internal users should get EPM PACKAGE from OS2TOOLS. EPMnnnDL.FLS contains
- the DLLs (where nnn refers to the version number); EPMnnnEX.FLS contains the
- executables (*.EXE and *.EX), help files (EPM.HLP and EPMHELP.QHL), and a
- README file; EPMDOC.FLS contains the online manuals (*.INF) for use with the
- VIEW command and an index file (EPMTECH.NDX); EMACROS.FLS contains the macros.
- All the FLSBIN files on the host must be downloaded in binary, then unpacked
- using LOADRAM2.
-
- Non-IBM users will have the EPMBBS package, either as a set of ZIP files from
- the IBM OS/2 BBS's, from Compuserve, or via anonymous FTP from
- software.watson.IBM.com or other anonymous FTP sites, *or* on a CD-ROM or
- diskettes. The diskettes may have the ZIP files; the CD-ROM has the files
- already uncompressed into subdirectories. The EPMBBS package includes an
- EPMBBS.TXT file describing all the files included; only a subset will be
- described here: EPMDLL.ZIP contains the DLLs; EPMAPP.ZIP contains the
- executables (*.EXE and *.EX), quick help file (EPMHELP.QHL), and index file
- (EPMTECH.NDX); EPMHLP.ZIP contains the help file (EPM.HLP); EPMMAC.ZIP contains
- the macros.
-
- EPM can be used with OS/2 1.3 or above. The IBM internal distribution includes
- everything necessary; the external package would require the purchase of
- additional DLLs in order to run on OS/2 1.3. When installing on OS/2 2.0 or
- above, you can add this version of EPM as a separate package, or replace the
- existing Enhanced Editor. The subdirectories to be used when replacing the
- existing Enhanced Editor are given in brackets; [\os2] refers to the \os2
- directory on your OS/2 installation drive. The suggestions to not use the OS/2
- directories apply only when not replacing the Enhanced Editor version of EPM.
-
- Place the executables and quick help file in an EPM subdirectory on a hard
- disk. (Here, we will assume D:\EDIT\EPM.) [\os2\apps]
-
- The DLL's are dynalink libraries, which should be placed in a subdirectory in
- your LIBPATH. You can create a new subdirectory for EPM, or place the DLLs in a
- generic \DLL subdirectory. We suggest you not use one of OS/2's directories.
- [\os2\apps\dll]
-
- Place the E macro files in an EMACROS subdirectory on a hard disk. (Here, we
- will assume C:\EMACROS.)
-
- The EPM.HLP help file should be placed in a subdirectory listed in your HELP
- setting in CONFIG.SYS. You can create a new subdirectory for EPM, or place the
- file in a generic \HELP subdirectory. We suggest you not use one of OS/2's
- directories. [\os2\help]
-
- The INF files should be placed in a directory in your BOOKSHELF setting.
-
- The NDX file can be placed in a directory in your EPMPATH or DPATH setting.
-
- 1. Add EPM subdirectory to your PATH environment variable in your CONFIG.SYS
- file. For example:
-
- set path=d:\edit\epm;c:\os2;c:\os2\system; ...
-
- 2. Create an EPMPATH environment variable in your CONFIG.SYS file specifying
- your EPM subdirectory. For example:
-
- set EPMPATH=d:\edit\epm
-
- EPM will search for EPM.EX (the translated macros), and all other *.ex
- files it needs to operate, in:
-
- a. the current directory, and then in
-
- b. the directories specified by the EPMPATH environment variable, and then
- in
-
- c. the directories specified by the PATH environment variable, and then in
-
- d. the same directory as the editor's EPM.EXE file.
-
- 3. Be sure the DLL files are referenced by the LIBPATH tag in CONFIG.SYS.
-
- Add your new EPM directory to the LIBPATH tag in your CONFIG.SYS file or
- copy all .DLL files to your C:\OS2\DLL subdirectory.
-
- 4. If you always start EPM from the same place (so that EPM's current
- subdirectory is the one containing the .HLP files), then you can simply put
- the .HLP files in EPM subdirectory. If not, then you must include the
- directory containing the .HLP files in your HELP setting in your
- CONFIG.SYS, so that the OS/2 Help Manager can find them.
-
- 5. Optional Step: Create a program reference. For information on doing this
- see the OS/2 Online Help.
-
- 6. Add EPM to STARTUP.CMD (Optional).
-
- You can add EPM to your OS/2 start up batch file. This will put EPM icon in
- the parking lot at the bottom of the screen, ready for use. To do this, add
- to your STARTUP.CMD:
-
- start d:\edit\epm\epm.exe /i
- (or whatever directory name you put EPM in).
-
- 7. To make the changes take effect, especially if you've modified the LIBPATH
- statement, reboot your machine. Select Shutdown, or press Ctrl-Alt-Del
- simultaneously to reboot. Rebooting is not necessary if you did not change
- LIBPATH, but the changes to Path and addition of Epmpath to CONFIG.SYS
- won't be recognized until the next reboot unless you specifically type them
- at the OS2 command prompt.
-
- Fini! You can run the standard EPM as is at this point. We strongly recommend
- that new users become familiar with the many features of standard EPM before
- customizing it.
-
- If you are interested in customizing EPM, you will need to:
-
- 1. Be sure EPM.E expects to include your changes in a compile.
-
- Changes to MYCNF.E, MYSTUFF.E and some other MY*.E files will be
- automatically included. See Adding New Features, Changing the Default
- Configuration, and The EPM Editor Technical Reference for specifics.
- 2. Recompile EPM.E.
-
- ETPM EPM
-
- See the section Compiling Macros for more information on ETPM.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.2. To Invoke the Editor ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- There are a few ways of invoking EPM depending on how you installed it and from
- where you wish to run it:
-
- o From the Desktop Manager's Main Group (or other group)
-
- Assuming it's been added there: Double click on the name you gave it and
- watch EPM book icon appear at the bottom of the screen. Continue as in the
- next item.
-
- o From the running editor icon on the desktop
-
- Assuming you've added EPM to STARTUP.CMD and the system's either been
- rebooted or you've explicitly run STARTUP: Double click on the icon and
- respond to the Enter File Name dialog box that appears by entering the file
- specification of the file to be edited. Use the file specification discussed
- in the next item.
-
- Note: If you don't enter a name, an edit window will appear entitled
- .Untitled which you can name later.
-
- o From the OS/2 command prompt.
-
- EPM filespec
-
- Filespec can be one or more file names. If a specified file doesn't exist it
- will be created. Multiple files can be loaded into a ring (more on the ring
- structure soon) by using wildcard characters or separating the filenames with
- spaces. For example:
-
- *.asm
- fileA.e fileB.e fileC.e
- In the first example, all the files with a extension of .ASM will be loaded
- into a ring. In the second example the fileA.e, fileB.e, and fileC.e will be
- loaded (or created if they don't already exist) into a ring.
-
- Once you've invoked EPM, the file(s) will be loaded into EPM's own free-roaming
- PM window. See Adding Files into an Edit Ring for information on seeing the
- different files in a ring. See EPM Window Setup for more information on the
- window.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.3. OS/2 Command Line Startup Options ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Several slash options can be given to EPM upon startup to initiate various
- editor features. A list of these options follow:
-
- /e Overrides the default loading of EPM.EX. A path and file name of a .ex file
- must follow the '/e' option.
-
- EPM /eC:\MYEPM\MYEPM.EX
-
- /i Keeps EPM running even when all windows have been terminated.
-
- /m Forces a new instance of EPM book icon, even if another EPM book already
- exists. (/M stands for Multiple.) Useful from a command file, when you want
- to ensure that control will not return until after the edit session ends.
- Normally, if an EPM book icon exists, a call to EPM will pass the arguments
- to the existing book and immediately return to the calling OS/2 session.
-
- /o Directs EPM to skip over the first open file dialog and display the File
- list dialog by default. This affects the Open dialog called from EPM book
- icon, and the Edit, Open and Get dialogs called from an EPM edit window.
-
- After removing any of the above options, the OS/2 command line argument is
- passed to an internal Edit command. This means that you can pass EPM commands
- to be executed as well as files to be edited on EPM command line. See the
- description of the EDIT command for examples of passing commands to the new
- edit window.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3. Basic Procedures ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- This section will cover all of the basic procedures necessary to begin editing
- right away. The procedures will be described in an abbreviated fashion.
- Detailed descriptions of the procedures will be given later in the manual.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.1. EPM Window Setup ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- The screen should be a familiar PM window that will look something like:
-
- This is the title bar. It contains the icon for the system (which
- also functions as a direct manipulation icon). As well as the
- filename of the file being edited, two ring buttons, and the
- minimizing and maximizing arrows.
- This is the action bar which has six options listed (this can be
- changed). To use one of these functions, position the mouse over your
- choice and hit button one. Then position the mouse over your choice
- from within the menu and hit button one on your mouse again.
- Alternatively, you can press F10 or press and release the Alt key to
- reach the action bar. Then use the arrow keys on your keyboard to
- reach the correct function. Press enter to choose that function. Use
- the arrow keys and enter in the same way to choose the menu function.
- This is the status line. It defaults to displaying the cursor line
- number, the total number of lines in the file, the cursor column
- number, the insert/replace mode of the cursor, the modify state (only
- displayed when the file has been modified) and the number of files in
- the ring. This can be altered. See the STATUS_TEMPLATE configuration
- option for more information on modifying the status line. The status
- line display can be turned off (or on) using the Status line option
- from the Frame Controls cascade in the Options action bar menu.
- The Message line
- The message line is used to display editor messages. This line can be
- toggled off (or on) using the Message line option from the Frame
- Controls cascade in the Options action bar menu. If the message line
- has been toggled off, the messages will be displayed temporarily
- overlaying the status line. If the status line is not present, then
- the messages will be displayed temporarily overlaying the first line
- of the file area. If a line is overlaid, it will be restored with the
- next keyboard or mouse action taken.
-
- Note: In the standard configuration, the Message Line has been
- toggled off. Thus messages will temporarily overwrite the Status Line
- as needed.
-
-
- File Area
- This is where your file is displayed and can be updated. It is by
- default a white window with black text (this can be changed).
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.2. Basic Cursor Movement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- The easiest way to move around EPM file area is through the use of the
- following cursor movement keys:
-
- Up arrow
- Moves cursor one line up.
- Down arrow
- Moves cursor one line down.
- Left arrow
- Moves cursor one character to the left.
- Right arrow
- Moves cursor one character to the right.
- Home
- Moves cursor to the beginning of the current line.
- End
- Moves cursor to the end of the current line.
- Page up
- Shifts view to page above current page, cursor stays at
- same position on screen.
- Page down
- Shifts view to page below current page, cursor stays at
- same position on screen.
- Ctrl+Home
- Moves cursor to top line of file.
- Ctrl+End
- Moves cursor to bottom line of file.
- Ctrl+Page up
- Moves cursor to top of screen.
- Ctrl+Page down
- Moves cursor to bottom of screen.
- Ctrl+Left
- Moves cursor to beginning of word left of cursor.
- Ctrl+Right
- Moves cursor to beginning of word to right of cursor.
- Tab
- Moves cursor to next tab stop. (See Setting Tabs).
- Shift-tab
- Moves cursor to previous tab stop. (See Setting Tabs).
- Enter
- Inserts a new line and moves the cursor under first
- non-blank character of the previous line.
- Ctrl-Enter
- Moves cursor to column 1 of next line.
-
- See Also:
-
- o Cursor Movement- more information on cursor movement in EPM.
- o Stream verses Line Mode- information on stream and line modes.
- o Enter Key Behavior- information on configuring the enter key.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.3. Basic File Control ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- How to open, close, print, save and rename files.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.3.1. Opening a New Edit Ring ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- There are three ways to open a new edit ring:
-
- o From the OS/2 command line:
-
- 1. Type EPM
- 2. Press the ENTER key.
-
- o Using EPM book icon:
-
- 1. Double click on the book icon.
- 2. Hit OK.
-
- o From an already existing edit ring:
-
- 1. Open the File menu from the Action Bar.
- 2. Choose Open .Untitled selection.
-
- See Also:
-
- o Opening Edit Rings- Details on opening edit rings.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.3.2. Adding Files to an Existing Edit Ring ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Note: To add more than one file to the edit ring the Ring Enabled option must
- be turned on. If it is not, it can be turned on by choosing Ring
- Enabled from the Preferences cascade from the Options menu.
-
- To add files to an existing edit ring follow these steps:
-
- 1. Select the edit window to which you wish to add the file.
-
- Note: If none exists follow the procedure found in Opening a New Edit Ring
-
-
- 2. Either:
-
- o Select Add File... from the File menu, or:
-
- o Press the F8 key.
-
- 3. If the file you wish to load is found in the recently loaded file list in
- the newly created dialog box, load it by double-clicking on it with the
- mouse or by selecting it with the arrow keys and hitting ENTER, or if you
- know the name of the file you wish to load, you can type it in the Entry
- Field and press Enter. Otherwise:
-
- a. Press the File list... button.
- b. To load a file from the newly created window follow these steps:
-
- 1. Change the current drive if necessary by moving to the drive window
- and typing the letter of the drive or selecting the drive by opening
- the pull down list by clicking on the down arrow with the mouse or by
- typing Ctrl+Down.
- 2. Change the current directory if necessary by double clicking on the
- directory name with the left mouse button or by selecting the
- directory name with the keyboard and pressing Enter.
- 3. Finally open the file by double clicking on the name in the file list
- with the left mouse button or by selecting the file(s) you want and
- pressing Enter.
-
- Note: Further help on the file list box is available and can be
- accessed by pressing the help button in the dialog box.
-
-
- The dialog box is now clear and the file will be active in the current edit
- window.
-
- See Also:
-
- o Adding Files to an Edit Ring- Details on adding files to an edit ring.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.3.3. Closing Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- To close the current file in the active edit ring either:
-
- 1. Open the File menu.
- 2. Choose Quit.
-
- Or:
-
- 1. Press F3.
-
- Note: If the file has been modified since your last save EPM will prompt you
- on whether you wish to save or discard your changes. To continue press
- the appropriate button.
-
- See Also:
-
- o Closing the Current File- Details on closing files.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.3.4. Saving Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- To save the current file either:
-
- 1. Open the File menu.
- 2. Choose the Save command.
-
- Or:
-
- 1. Press F2.
-
- See Also:
-
- o Saving the Current File- Details on saving files.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.3.5. Renaming Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- To rename the current file:
-
- 1. Bring up the Rename dialog box either:
-
- a. Open the File menu.
- b. Choose Rename....
-
- Or:
-
- a. Press F7.
-
- 2. Change the name in the entry field to the new name and press ENTER.
-
- See Also:
-
- o Renaming the Current File- Details on renaming files.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.3.6. Printing Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- To print a file:
-
- 1. Open the File menu.
- 2. Choose Print File....
- 3. Choose the appropriate printing device.
- 4. Choose either Formatted Print to print to an OS/2 Print queue, or Raw ASCII
- text to print to an LPT or COM port.
- 5. If you selected Formatted Print, you can select Options to choose either
- WYSIWYG or draft mode.
- 6. Press the Print button.
-
- Note: When printing in WYSIWYG mode, it is important to realize that light
- foreground colors will not appear on a non-color printer. To compensate
- for this, it is necessary to either change the foreground to a dark
- color (preferably black) or ensure that Monochrome is selected on the
- Print Options dialog. Background color is ignored when printing in
- WYSIWYG mode.
-
- See Also:
-
- o Printing the File- Details on printing.
- o Direct Manipulation Using the File Icon- Printing using the file icon.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.4. Marking ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- How to create the three types of EPM marks:
-
- o Line marks
- o Block marks
- o Character marks
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.4.1. Line Marks ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- To create a line mark with the keyboard:
-
- 1. Place the cursor on the line from which you wish to originate the mark.
- 2. Press Alt+L.
- 3. Place the cursor on the line where you want to end the mark.
- 4. Press Alt+L.
-
- To create a line mark with the mouse:
-
- 1. Place the mouse cursor over the line where you want the mark to begin.
- 2. Hold down the right mouse button.
- 3. Drag the mouse until the lines which you wish to mark are highlighted.
- 4. Release the mouse button.
-
- Note: Advanced marking must be activated.
-
- See Also:
-
- o Line Marks- Details on creating line marks.
- o Basic Marks- Creating basic marks.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.4.2. Block Marks ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- To create a block mark with the keyboard:
-
- 1. Place the cursor to the left of the character where you wish to begin the
- block mark.
- 2. Press Alt+B.
- 3. Place the cursor to the left of the character where you wish to end the
- mark.
- 4. Press Alt+B.
-
- To create a block mark with the mouse:
-
- 1. Place the mouse cursor over the character where you want the mark to begin.
- 2. Hold down mouse button 1.
- 3. Drag the mouse until the characters which you wish to mark are highlighted.
- 4. Release the mouse button.
-
- Note: Advanced marking must be activated.
-
- See Also:
-
- o Block Marks- Details on creating block marks.
- o Basic Marks- Creating basic marks.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.4.3. Character Marks ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- To create a character mark with the keyboard:
-
- 1. Place the cursor to the left of the character where you wish to begin the
- mark.
- 2. Press Alt+Z.
- 3. Place the cursor to the left of the character where you wish to end the
- mark.
- 4. Press Alt+Z.
-
- To create a character mark with the mouse:
-
- 1. Place the mouse cursor over the character where you want the mark to begin.
- 2. Hold down the Ctrl key as well as mouse button 1 or just press mouse button
- 3 if you have a 3 button mouse.
- 3. Drag the mouse until the characters which you wish to mark are highlighted.
- 4. Release the mouse button.
-
- Note: Advanced marking must be activated.
-
- See Also:
-
- o Character Marks- Details on creating character marks.
- o Basic Marks- Creating basic marks.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.5. Mark Manipulation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- These are the basic keys for mark manipulation:
-
- Key Effect
-
- Alt+C Copy the marked block to the current cursor position.
-
- Alt+D Delete the currently marked text from the document.
-
- Alt+M Move the marked block to the current cursor position.
-
- Alt+U Remove the current mark.
-
- Alt+A Overlays block onto current cursor position and fills the origin with
- blanks.
-
- Alt+O Overlay the marked text onto the cursor poition.
-
- See Also:
-
- o Moving Text- Details on moving text.
- o Copying Text- Details on copying text.
- o Deleting Text- Details on deleting text.
- o Removing Marks- Details on removing marks.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.6. Setting Margins ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- To set the margins in EPM follow these steps:
-
- 1. Press Ctrl+I to bring up the EPM Command Line dialog box.
- 2. Type MARGINS followed by a space.
- 3. Type the left margin followed by a space.
- 4. Type the right margin followed by a space.
- 5. Press ENTER.
-
- For example, if you wanted to set the left margin for 10 and the right margin
- for 75 then you would type the following at the EPM Command Line:
-
- MARGINS 10 75
-
- See Also:
-
- o MARGINS command - More details on the MARGINS command.
- o Changing Common Default Values Via the Settings Dialog
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.7. Setting Tabs ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Here's how to set tabs in EPM:
-
- 1. Press ESC to bring up the EPM Command Line dialog box.
- 2. Type TABS followed by the frequency of the tab stops.
-
- For example, if you wanted to set tab stops at every 4 characters you would
- type TABS 4 at the Command LIne.
-
- See Also:
-
- o TABS command- More details on the TABS command.
- o Changing Common Default Values Via the Settings Dialog
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.8. Changing Font and Color ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- To change the current font and/or color of selected text, follow this
- procedure:
-
- 1. Create a mark. See Marking for information on creating marks.
- 2. Either:
-
- a. Press Ctrl+Y
-
- Or:
-
- a. Open the Edit menu.
- b. Choose Style....
-
- 3. Change the font by choosing one from the font list.
- 4. Change foreground color by:
-
- a. Clicking on the Foreground radio button.
- b. Choosing a new color from the color list.
-
- 5. Change background color by:
-
- a. Clicking on the Background radio button.
- b. Choosing a new color from the color list.
-
- To change the current font and/or color of the current file, see Changing
- Common Default Values Via the Settings Dialog.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4. File Manipulation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- This section contains detailed descriptions of all of the commands and
- procedures which deal with the control of files.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.1. File Fundamentals ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- EPM can be thought as existing on three separate levels. The highest level
- contains EPM program. This top level controls and manages the Edit Rings which
- are found on the second level. Each of these Edit Rings has its own
- Presentation Manager Window as well as control over a group of files which can
- be considered the third level. A schematic of these levels would look
- something like this:
-
- ΓòöΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉΓòù
- ΓòæEPMΓòæ
- ΓòÜΓòÉΓòñΓòÉΓò¥
- ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
- Γöé Γöé Γöé
- ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
- ΓöéEdit Ring 1Γöé ΓöéEdit Ring 2Γöé ΓöéEdit Ring 3Γöé
- ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ
- ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ Γöé Γöé
- ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
- ΓöéFILE1.DOCΓöé ΓöéFILE2.DOCΓöé ΓöéFILE3.DOCΓöé ΓöéFILE4.DOCΓöé
- ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ
-
- In this example EPM has three Edit Rings open. The first Edit Ring contains two
- files, FILE1.DOC and FILE2.DOC. The second Edit Ring contains one file,
- FILE3.DOC. The third ring also contains one file, FILE4.DOC.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.2. Opening Edit Rings ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- The advantage of starting a new window is that you get a new instance of the
- editor, with its own heap and mark. The disadvantage is that each new window
- takes about 70K of memory. We recommend keeping related files together in a
- window. Unrelated files (different projects) should be put in separate windows,
- so you can shrink or hide projects as you switch between tasks.
-
- When editing many files this feature helps group like files. For instance,
- when working on several different projects, each project can have its own ring
- containing all its own related files. As many rings as needed can be used.
-
- There are three ways in which you can open new edit rings. This section will
- cover each in detail.
-
- 1. From the OS/2 Command Line: To do this simply type EPM at the prompt. If
- you wish to load files directly into the new ring from the prompt, type the
- names of the files as arguments. It is possible to load multiple files
- into the ring using wildcards or by listing each individual file. All of
- the following examples are valid file arguments:
-
- EPM FILE1.DOC
- EPM FILE2.*
- EPM FILE?.TXT TEMPFILE D:\TEXT\*.*
-
- Several slash options can be given to EPM upon startup to initiate various
- editor features. For a list of these and their descriptions see OS/2
- Command Line Start Options.
-
- 2. Using EPM book icon: It is possible to create a new edit ring from EPM
- book icon by double clicking on it with the mouse. The Open dialog box
- will now appear, unless the /o option was specified when EPM was started,
- in which case File List dialog box will appear.
-
- 3. From an active edit ring From an open edit ring it is possible to create a
- new edit ring in the following ways:
-
- o Using the Open Command: The Open command can be activated in three ways:
-
- a. From the EPM Command Line: See Open command description for details
- on this.
- b. From EPM File menu: From EPM File menu the following items will open
- a new edit ring:
-
- - Open .Untitled: Will create the new edit ring with an unnamed file.
- - Open...: Will bring up the Open dialog box if activated or the File
- List dialog box otherwise.
-
- c. Using the keyboard: Type Ctrl+O or F5. This has the same effect as
- selecting the Open... menu item.
-
- Another way of opening edit rings is though the use of the OPENPATH command.
- The OPENPATH command allows you to search a path variable for a file. For
- example, if you wanted to serarch for the file TEST.E which you know is in one
- of the directories of the PATH variable, you would enter this command:
-
- OPENPATH TEST.E PATH
-
- If the system variable is not given OPENPATH will default to the EPMPATH,
- unless the file given has a CMD extension, when it will default to the PATH
- variable. The OPENPATH command can be abbreviated to OP.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3. Adding Files to an Edit Ring ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- There are three ways to add new files to an EPM Edit Ring:
-
- 1. Using the EPM Command Line: The Edit command.
-
- 2. Using the File menu: Choose the Add File... menu item. This will bring up
- the Add File dialog box if activated or the File List dialog box otherwise.
-
- 3. Using the keyboard: Press F8. This has the same effect as using the file
- menu.
-
- Another way of adding files is though the use of the EPATH command. The EPATH
- command allows you to search a path variable for a file. For example, if you
- wanted to search for the file TEST.E which you know is in one of the
- directories of the PATH variable, you would enter this command:
-
- EPATH TEST.E PATH
-
- If the system variable is not given EPATH will default to the EPMPATH, unless
- the file given has a CMD extension, when it will default to the PATH variable.
- The EPATH command can be abbreviated to EP.
-
- When adding files it important to note the current status of the BROWSE
- command. If BROWSE is turned on, you will be unable to modify the file. To
- determine the state of the BROWSE variable type either BROWSE or BROWSE ? at
- the EPM Command Line. To activate BROWSE mode enter BROWSE ON. To turn off
- the feature use BROWSE OFF.
-
- Note: To add more than one file to the edit ring the Ring Enabled option must
- be turned on. If it is not, it can be turned on by choosing Ring
- Enabled from the Preferences cascade from the Options menu.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.4. Switching between Files in an Edit Ring ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- When multiple files are loaded into the editor, you see only one file at a time
- on your screen.
-
- There are three ways of switching between files in the current edit ring:
-
- 1. Scrolling through the files using the keyboard: You can view one of the
- other files that are already loaded by pressing the Ctrl-P, F11, Ctrl-N,
- F12 key.
-
- When multiple files are loaded into the editor, they are placed in a ring
- structure. This enables you to move through the ring of files forward
- (Ctrl-N[ext] or F12) and backward (Ctrl-P[revious] or F11), viewing all the
- files and always returning back to your original place. For example, assume
- that you have invoked the editor with the following filename specification:
-
- fileA.e fileB.e fileC.e
- When EPM window comes up, you will be viewing fileA.e. If you press F12 or
- Ctrl-N, you will see fileB.e, and you can see fileC.e by pressing F12 or
- Ctrl-N again. If you press the key once more, you will be returned to your
- view of fileA.e.
-
- 2. Selecting the current file using the ring list: Open the List Ring dialog
- box using either of the following methods:
-
- o Choosing the List Ring... item from the Options menu.
- o Typing Ctrl+G
-
- Then choose the file which you wish to activate from the files listed.
-
- 3. Using the Ring Buttons: These are the ring buttons:
-
- They are located on the Title bar. The ring buttons can also be used to
- switch between files. The left hand ring button switches to the previous
- file in the ring and the right hand one switches the next file.
-
- Note: To add more than one file to the edit ring the Ring Enabled option must
- be turned on. If it is not, it can be turned on by choosing Ring
- Enabled from the Preferences cascade from the Options menu.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.5. Saving the Current File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- To save the current file you may use any of the following procedures:
-
- o Using the EPM Command Line: Enter SAVE at the EPM Command Line.
-
- o Using the File Menu: There are two techniques for saving from the File menu:
-
- 1. Save: Saves the file.
- 2. Save as...: Allows the user to rename the file before saving by
- bringing up the Save as dialog box.
-
- o Using the keyboard: Type F2.
-
- EPM also contains an AUTOSAVE which will save the file after a set number of
- modifications have been made to the file. To view the current autosave
- settings type AUTOSAVE at the EPM Command Line, or select Autosave... from the
- Options menu. The autosave value is the number of modificatinos which must be
- made to the file before an autosave is preformed. Name is the name of the
- current autosave file. There are five options which can be used with the
- autosave command. They are as follows:
-
- Option Effect
- AUTOSAVE #### Sets the number of modifications before an autosave.
- Setting the number of modifications to 0 turns off the
- autosave feature.
- AUTOSAVE ON|OFF Turns the autosave feature on or off.
- AUTOSAVE ? Opens a dialog box containing the number of
- modifications between autosaves and the name of the
- current autosave file as well as the option to list
- all of the files in the autosave directory.
- AUTOSAVE DIR Lists all of the files in the autosave directory.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.6. Closing the Current File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- There are two different manners for closing files Quiting and Filing. Quitting
- simply closes the file, whereas filing will save the file then close it.
-
- They can be performed as follows:
-
- o Quitting: There are three different procedures for quitting:
-
- 1. From the EPM Command Line: Using the QUIT command.
- 2. From the File menu: Choose Quit.
- 3. Using the keyboard: Press F3.
-
- o Filing: There are several ways for filing:
-
- 1. From the EPM Command Line: Using the FILE command.
- 2. From the File menu: Choose Save and quit.
- 3. Using the keyboard: Press F4.
-
- In each of these cases, if the file has been modified since the previous save a
- Quitting file dialog box will appear which is self explanatory.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.7. Direct file manipulation using the File icon ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- The File icon is located to the left of the title bar. It can be used to
- achieve the following:
-
- o Print the current file.
- o Copy a file to another edit window.
- o Create another edit window containing your file.
- o Copy files to a folder on the desktop.
- The File icon is manipulated in the following way:
-
- Select the file icon by pointing to it with your pointing device (mouse) and
- pressing button 2. Keeping button 2 down, move the mouse pointer over either:
-
- o The Print Manager icon, to print the file.
- o An EPM edit window, to copy the file.
- o EPM icon, to create another edit window containing your file.
- o A folder on the desktop, to copy the file to that directory.
-
- Note: When dragging EPM file icon to the printer or to the File Manager, the
- current state of the file in memory will be printed or saved. When dragging EPM
- file icon to another EPM edit window or to the EPM book icon, the file loaded
- will be the file that exists on disk. Any changes made since the file was
- loaded or last saved will not be seen in the new copy.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.8. Renaming the File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- If you wish to rename the current file there are four ways in which to do it.
- All of the following are acceptable ways to rename files:
-
- 1. From the EPM Command Line: Issue the NAME command or the RENAME command.
-
- 2. Through the File Menu: Open the File menu then choose Rename.... To
- change the name of the file replace the name in the dialog box with the new
- name and press ENTER.
-
- 3. Using the mouse: Place the mouse cursor over EPM title bar then
- double-click with the right mouse button. The title bar will have now
- turned white and you can now change the name of the file.
-
- 4. Using the keyboard: Press F7.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.9. Printing a File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- To print in draft mode follow these steps:
-
- 1. Bring up the EPM Command Line.
-
- 2. Type PRINT.
-
- 3. Press the ENTER key.
- This procedure will print the marked text to the default printer. If no text
- is marked this procedure will print the entire file to the default printer.
-
- If you wish to print to a printer other than the defaut follow add enter the
- destination of the file as a parameter of the PRINT command. Valid destinations
- are LPT1: - LPT9:
-
- For example, if you wanted to print to LPT2: you would type this at the EPM
- Command Line:
-
- PRINT LPT2:
-
- An alternate way to print the file is:
-
- 1. Open the File menu from the Action Bar.
-
- 2. Choose Print file....
-
- This procedure will bring up a dialog box. In the dialog box first choose
- whether you want to print formatted text or raw ASCII text. Next choose the
- printer queue or printer port to which you wish to send the output. For
- formatted output, you can choose between draft and WYSIWYG printing mode.
-
- Warning: If printing in WYSIWYG mode the foreground text must be in a dark
- color, preferably BLACK, or Monochrome must be selected as a print option..
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.10. Appending a File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- To append a marked section of text from the current file, or the entire file to
- the end of a file which has not been loaded into the editor use the APPEND
- command. This command is used in the following manner:
-
- APPEND filename
-
- Where filename is the name of the file to which you wish to append the text.
- If a mark exists in the current file then just the text in this mark will be
- appended, otherwise the whole file will be. If the file given by the argument
- does not exist the command will create it. The PUT can be used as a synonym
- for the APPEND command.
-
- A related command is the GET command. The GET command allows you to load the
- contents of a file into the current file. For example, if you wished to add
- the file PYTHON.NEE into the current file you would enter:
-
- GET PYTHON.NEE
-
- This will load the file beginning at the current cursor location.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.11. Locking the File in a LAN ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- When using a LAN it may be necessary to lock files on occasion. To do this you
- can use the LOCK, or the /k option when loading the file. Files are
- automatically unlocked when a FILE or QUIT are given, but can be manually
- unlocked using the UNLOCK command.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.12. Searching for Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- It is possible to search for files using the LIST command. The syntax for this
- command is as follows: LIST filespec
-
- Use LIST to load a list of file names that match filespec. If filespec includes
- a path, then that directory is used as the starting point; if not, the current
- directory is used. Both the starting directory and any subdirectories are
- searched for matching files. This may take a significant amount of time (a
- minute or more) if you name a filespec that qualifies an entire hard disk, such
- as
-
- list \*.*
- Once you have the list, you can place the cursor on the name of a file, and
- then press Alt-1 to edit that file.
-
- FILEFIND and FINDFILE can be used as synonyms for the LIST command.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5. Marks and Marking ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Information of the creation, use and manipulation of marks.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.1. Marking Basics ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- A mark is a way of performing the same operation on a group of characters. For
- example, if you wanted to move a paragraph from one part of a file to an other,
- you would create a mark which encompassed all of the characters in that
- paragraph, then you could move the whole paragraph to the new location.
-
- EPM has two distinct marking modes: Basic and Advanced.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2. Basic Marking Mode ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- EPM Basic marking mode acts like the CUA marking used in PM entry fields. It
- should be familiar to all OS/2 users, but it lacks the power of the Advanced
- Marking Mode.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.1. Creating Marks ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- It is possible to create marks in the basic marking mode with the mouse or the
- keyboard.
-
- Using a mouse:
-
- 1. Place the mouse cursor over the first character which you wish to include
- in the mark.
- 2. Depress the left mouse button.
- 3. Drag the mouse to the last character to be included in the mark.
- 4. Release the left mouse button.
-
- Using the keyboard:
-
- 1. Place the text cursor to the left of the first character to be marked.
- 2. While holding down the Shift key, use the cursor keys to extened the mark.
-
- Note: The cursor keys which must be used are the cursor keys which are NOT
- part of the numberic key pad.
-
-
- The mark can be removed by moving the text cursor to another location using
- either the mouse or the cursor keys.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.2. Copying Marks ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- To copy text to a new location in Basic Marking Mode use the following
- procedure:
-
- 1. Create a mark. For information on doing this see Creating Marks.
- 2. Copy the text into the clipboard by pressing Ctrl+Ins, by selecting Copy
- from the Edit menu or by entereing the COPY2CLIP
- 3. Move the cursor to the location where you wish to copy the text to.
- 4. Copy the text from the clipboard by pressing Shift+Ins, by selecting Paste
- from the Edit menu or by using the PASTE command at EPM Command Line.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.3. Moving Marks ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- To move text to a new location in Basic Marking Mode use the following
- procedure:
-
- 1. Create a mark. For information on doing this see Creating Marks.
- 2. Cut the text into the clipboard by pressing Shift+Del, by choosing Cut from
- the Edit menu or by entering CUT command at the EPM Command Line.
- 3. Move the cursor to the location where you wish to copy the text to.
- 4. Copy the text from the clipboard by pressing Shift+Ins, by choosing Paste
- from the Edit menu or by using the PASTE command at EPM Command Line.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.4. Deleting Marks ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- To delete text using Basic Marking Mode:
-
- 1. Create a mark. For information on doing this see Creating Marks.
- 2. Press Del.
-
- Note: Pressing any other text key when an area is marked will replace the
- marked area with that character. Pressing Ctrl+Ins will replace the
- marked text with the text found in the clipboard.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.3. Advanced Marking Mode ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- EPM Advanced Marking mode has four basic types of marks: block, line, word and
- character.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.3.1. Creating Marks ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- To create a mark in the Advanced Marking mode you must first decide what type
- of mark you wish to make. There are four types of marks:
-
- o Block Mark
- o Line Mark
- o Word Mark
- o Character Mark
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.3.1.1. Creating a Block Mark ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Creating a Block Mark:
-
- To create a block mark you may use either the mouse or the keyboard. To create
- a block mark using the mouse follow these steps:
-
- 1. Place the mouse cursor over the position where you wish to begin the mark.
- 2. Hold down mouse button 1.
- 3. Drag the mouse until the area which you wish to mark is enclosed in the
- highlighted box.
- 4. Release mouse button 1.
-
- If you do not have a mouse or if you prefer using the keyboard, you can use the
- following procedure:
-
- 1. Place the text cursor where you wish one of the corners of the block mark
- to be located.
- 2. Press Alt+B.
- 3. Move the text cursor to the position where you want the opposite corner of
- the block mark to be. For example, if the first postion was meant to be
- the lower-left corner of the block mark, the second should be the location
- of the upper-right corner.
- 4. Press Alt+B.
-
- Note: If a block mark already exists when Alt+B is pressed, the block mark
- will be changed so that the current cursor location and the
- upper-left corner of the old block mark are used as the anchor points.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.3.1.2. Creating a Line Mark ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Creating a Line Mark: Line marks can also be created using either the mouse or
- the keyboard. Using the mouse:
-
- 1. Place the mouse cursor on the line from which you wish to originate the
- line mark.
- 2. Press mouse button 2.
- 3. Drag the mouse cursor to the line where you wish end the mark.
- 4. Release mouse button 2.
-
- Using the keyboard:
-
- 1. Move the text cursor to the line where you want to begin the line mark.
- 2. Press Alt+L.
- 3. Move to the line which you desire to end the block.
- 4. Press Alt+L.
-
- Note: If Alt+L is pressed when a line mark already exists, the current
- line mark will be extended in the following manner: if Alt+L is
- pressed on a line above the first line in the current mark, the mark
- will be extened from the bottom the current mark to the current
- line, otherwise it will be extened from the top of the current mark
- to the current line.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.3.1.3. Creating a Character Mark ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Creating a Character Mark:
-
- Using a mouse
-
- 1. Place the mouse cursor over the character where you choose to begin the
- mark.
- 2. Hold down Ctrl+mouse button 2 (or just press mouse button 3 if you have a
- 3-button mouse).
- 3. Drag the mouse to the location where you wish to end the mark.
-
- There are two different ways to create character marks using the keyboard. The
- first is to simply hold down the Shift key and move the cursor using the
- non-numeric cursor keys to extend the mark.
-
- The second manner of creating character marks with the keyboard is as follows:
-
- 1. Move the text cursor to the character where you wish to begin the mark.
- 2. Press Alt+Z.
- 3. Move to the character where you wish to end the mark.
- 4. Press Alt+Z.
-
- Note: If a character mark already exists when Alt+Z is pressed the mark
- will be created as follows: If Alt+Z was pressed on a character
- which is located after the first character in the current mark, the
- mark will enclose all of the characters between the beginning of the
- existing block to the current cursor position. Otherwise, the mark
- will be made such that it will extend from the end of the current
- block to the current cursor position.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.3.1.4. Creating a Word Mark ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Creating a Word Mark:
-
- Using the keyboard:
-
- 1. Place the text cursor on the word which you wish to mark.
- 2. Press Alt+W or enter MARKWORD at the EPM Command Line.
-
- Using the mouse:
-
- 1. Double-click mouse button 2 on the word you wish to mark.
-
- Note: Word marks can be extended as if it were a block mark.
-
- A word is assumed to extend from the current character left and right with a
- space on the beginning or end of the line is encountered.
-
- This is not always satisfactory. For example, when writing a C program, you
- might have:
-
- result=function(parameter1,parameter2);
-
- and want to mark the first parameter; Alt+W would mark the entire function call
- (because it doesn't contain any spaces). A variety of word mark is available
- that picks out C language tokens:
-
- Using the keyboard:
-
- 1. Place the text cursor on the word which you wish to mark.
- 2. Press Ctrl+W.
-
- Using the mouse:
-
- 1. Press and hold Ctrl and double-click mouse button 2 on the word you wish to
- mark.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.3.2. Copying Marks ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- To copy text to a new location it is necessary to first create a mark. Once you
- have done this, to copy the mark, move the cursor to the location where you
- wish to insert the copy and press Ctrl+C or hold down the Ctrl key and mouse
- button 2 while the mouse pointer is within the marked area, then drag the mouse
- to the new location.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.3.3. Moving Marks ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- To move marked text move the text cursor to the location where you wish to
- insert the text and press Alt+M. An alternate way is to use the mouse. To do
- so, first place the mouse pointer over the mark. Depress the right mouse
- button. Drag the mouse so that the cursor is over the location where you wish
- to place the text. Release the mouse button.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.3.4. Deleting Marks ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- To delete a mark, press Alt+D.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.3.5. Mark Overlay ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- It is possible in EPM to overlay a mark onto another location, i.e. move or
- copy a marked area to another location, while replacing anything which might
- have been there. There are two key which are used to perform this operation,
- Alt+A and Alt+O The difference between the two is that Alt+A fills the
- originally marked area with blanks, whereas Alt+O does not.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.3.6. Removing Marks ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- To remove any existing marks type Alt+U or double-click the left mouse button.
-
- Note: EPM only allows you to have one mark in existence at a time, so you must
- remove the mark before making a new one.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.3.7. Scrolling ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- To scroll the text in the current mark to the left or right use Ctrl+F7 and
- Ctrl+F8, respectively.
-
- Note: Characters which are scrolled past the left side of the mark are lost.
- They will not return if you attempt to retrieve them by scrolling back right.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.3.8. Adjusting a Paragraph to New Margins ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- To set the margins, issue the margins command from the command line dialog box.
- For example, to set the left margin to the first column, the right margin to
- the seventy-fifth column, and the paragraph indent to 5 spaces, issue the
- following command:
-
- margins 1 75 5
-
- Reflowing a paragraph that's followed by a blank line (or end of file) is easy;
- EPM knows that the paragraph has ended when it sees the blank line. EPM also
- recognizes script tags (a period in the first column) as an end of paragraph.
- Simply move the cursor to the beginning of the paragraph and press Alt-P.
-
- If the paragraph is not terminated with a blank line or end of file, you must
- tell EPM where to stop by marking the paragraph as follows:
-
- 1. Move the cursor to the beginning of a paragraph and press Alt-L.
- 2. Move the cursor to the end of the paragraph and press Alt-L. EPM will
- highlight the text you have marked.
- 3. Now you can press Alt-P to adjust the marked paragraph to the current
- margin settings.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4. Procedures Valid for both Marking Modes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Procedures which are valid for both marking modes.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.1. Filling Marks ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Filling a mark means that you are turning every character within that mark to
- the character specified in the command. To fill a mark you can either press
- Alt+F or enter the FILL command at the EPM Command Line.
-
- For example, if you wanted to fill the marked area with the character A you
- would either press Alt+F then enter A in the newly created dialog box, or
- entering the following at the EPM Command Line:
-
- FILL A
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.2. Simple Math Functions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- The ADD and MULT commands cause EPM to add and multiply, respectively, all of
- the numbers in a mark. The answer will be placed in the line below the mark.
- These commands will fail if there are characters present in the mark.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.3. Sorting ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Entering SORT at the EPM Command Line causes EPM to sort the lines in the
- marked area, or the entire file if no area is marked. If a block mark exists,
- the marked columns will be used as the sort key; if not, the first 20 columns
- of each line will be used.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.4. Uppercase/Lowercase ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- If you wish to set all of the letters in a marked area to either their
- uppercase or lowercase characters enter the UPPERCASE or LOWERCASE command at
- EPM command line. As a short cut, the Ctrl+F3 and Ctrl+F2 key combinations can
- be used for uppercase and lowercase, respectively.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.5. Reflowing Marked Text ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- The Alt-R key lets you reflow a section of text to a new shape. It's typically
- used to reformat a special paragraph (like a figure caption or example) to new
- margins without changing the standard margins.
-
- First mark the text to be reformatted (with any type of mark), then press
- Alt-R. You will be prompted to mark the new block - the shape you want the
- block to be reflowed into. Move the cursor around and press Alt-B twice to
- define the new area, in the same place as the original text or elsewhere in the
- document. Then press Alt-R again and the text will be reflowed. The space from
- which the text came will be filled with blanks.
-
- Alt-P will reflow a block marked area into the shape and size of the marked
- area, ignoring the margin settings. In other words, with a block mark, Alt-P
- behaves as if you marked a block, pressed Alt-R, and remarked the same block.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.6. Centering Text ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- To center the text in the current mark type Alt+T. If there is no text
- currently marked the text is centered between the current margins.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.7. Executing Marked Lines ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- By pressing Alt+0 (Alt+Zero) or Alt+= EPM will execute the current line, or all
- marked lines, as a command. If a line mark exists, you will be asked if you
- wish to execute all marked lines. Select Yes to execute each marked line as
- though it had been entered in the EPM command line dialog, select No to execute
- only the current line, or select Cancel to cancel the command.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6. Text Layout and Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- EPM has several variables which define how the text in the edit window looks.
- For example, tabs, margins, color, and font. This section will describe how to
- adjust these and related attributes.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1. Font and Color ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- EPM allows you to change the physical appearance of all of characters in a
- mark. To do this it is first necessary to mark an area of text. For details on
- doing this, see either Advanced Marks or Basic Marks, depending on which
- marking mode you are currently working with.
-
- After creating a mark, the next step in changing the font and color of text is
- to bring up the style dialog box. To do so, either press Ctrl+Y or choose
- Style... from the Edit menu.
-
- To change the current font, select a new one from the Font name combination
- box. There are several options which can affect the outcome of the font. The
- font can be made bold, italicized, outlined, underlined, or struckout by
- pressing the appropriate button. The font size can also be changed using the
- Font size combination box.
-
- Note: The block mark is rectangular with respect to the number of characters
- within it, not by physical size. Therefore, if a proportional font is
- used the block mark will not appear to be rectangular.
-
- Both the foreground and background color of the text can be changed using the
- style dialog box. To change either first choose it by clicking on the
- appropriate radio button, then choosing the new color from the Color
- combination box.
-
- Note: When printing in WYSIWYG mode, it is important to realize that light
- foreground colors will not appear on a non-color printer. To compensate
- for this it is necessary to change the foreground to a dark color
- (preferably black), or to select Monochrome from the printer Options
- dialog. Background color is ignored when printing in WYSIWYG mode.
-
- The current text appearance is located in the box located at the top of the
- dialog box. This allows you to see the tentative style before you make the
- change permanent.
-
- To make the changes in style press the Apply button.
-
- Note: Using mixed colors can slow down painting of the screen a little, and
- using mixed fonts can slow it down quite a bit.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2. Defining Styles ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- It can be useful on occasion to name and then save the current text style so
- that it can be easily called up later and reused. To do this it is first
- necessiary to mark an area of text. For details on doing this, see either
- Advanced Marks or Basic Marks, depending on which marking mode you are
- currently working with. Next, call up the style dialog box. To do so, either
- press Ctrl+Y or choose Style... from the Edit menu.
-
- Next, adjust the style to the appearance which you wish to save. For
- information on doing this see Font and Color.
-
- To register the current style, type the name by which you wish to call the font
- in the Style name entry field, then press the Register button.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.3. Setting Tabs ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Type in the tabs command (on the command line dialog) and press the ENTER key.
- The tabs command has the following syntax:
-
- tabs [t1 [t2 [t3 .. t32] ] ]
-
- Examples:
-
- tabs 1 9 17 25 33
- tabs
- tabs 4
-
- The first example will set the tabs to the columns 1, 9, 17, 25, and 33. The
- second example (the tabs command with no arguments) will display the current
- tab settings and allow them to be changed. In the third example, the tabs are
- set every four spaces at 1 5 9 13 ... 125. See the TABS command for more
- information.
-
- EPM has another type of tab which uses the beginning of the words in the
- previous line as tab stops. To put EPM into this mode the MATCHTAB must be
- used. Entering MATCHTAB will cause EPM to display the current status of the
- setting. ON means that the function is active and the proceeding line is used
- for tab stops. OFF means that the set tabs will be used. To change the
- setting follow the command by the new value. For example, MATCHTAB ON will
- turn it on.
-
- It is also important to be aware of the TABKEY command. This toggles whether
- or not a tab character is inserted when the Tab key is pressed.
-
- Note: MATCHTAB will not act properly if TABKEY is enabled.
-
- Note: Use the Settings dialog to permanently change the default tabs.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.4. Setting Margins ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Type in the margins command (on the command line dialog) and press the ENTER
- key. The margins command has the following syntax:
-
- margins [left-margin [right-margin [new-paragraph-margin] ] ]
-
- Examples:
- margins 1 70 5
- margins
-
- The first example sets the left margin to the first column, the right margin to
- the 70th column, and the paragraph indent to the fifth column. The second
- example shows you the current margin settings and allows them to be altered.
-
- As you continue typing, EPM will keep your text within the new margin settings.
- But you will notice that your previously-entered text is not automatically
- reflowed to the new margin settings. See Reflowing Marked Text for the steps to
- adjust an old paragraph to the new settings.
-
- Note: Use the Settings dialog to permanently change the default margins.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7. Controlling OS/2 with EPM ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- It is possible to execute many OS/2 commands from the EPM Command Line. If you
- don't need to see the command's output, or respond to any prompts, you can
- simply enter the command on the EPM Command Line. For example,
-
- erase tempfile
- or
-
- start someprogram
-
- A few OS/2 commands (for example, CD and DIR) have EPM front-ends defined which
- let you see the output inside EPM. For any other OS/2 command for which you
- need to see the output, you have two choices:
-
- OS2 command This opens up an OS/2 windowed command prompt to execute the
- specified command.
-
- SHELL command This creates a new file in the edit ring that is connected to an
- OS/2 command prompt. OS/2 commands entered in this window will have
- their output appear asynchronously in the edit window.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8. Cursor Movement and Editor Features ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Cursor movement and editor features.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.1. Cursor Movement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- The following is a summary of all of the key strokes which cause cursor
- movement:
-
- End
- Moves the cursor to the end of the line.
- Home
- Moves the cursor to the beginning of the line.
- PgDn
- Moves the line at the current cursor position forward (down) one
- screen.
- PgUp
- Moves the line at the current cursor position backward (up) one
- screen.
- Tab
- Moves the cursor to the next tab stop.
- Shift+Tab
- Moves the cursor to the previous tab stop.
- Shift+F1
- Scrolls the screen left one column.
- Shift+F2
- Scrolls the screen right one column.
- Shift+F3
- Scrolls the screen down one row.
- Shift+F4
- Scrolls the screen up one row.
- Shift+F5
- Scrolls the screen so that the line at the current cursor position is
- vertically centered.
- Ctrl+F5
- Moves the cursor to the beginning of the current word.
- Ctrl+F6
- Moves the cursor to the end of the current word.
- Ctrl+Enter
- Moves cursor to the beginning of the next line.
- Ctrl+Left
- Moves the cursor to the beginning of the word to left of cursor.
- Ctrl+Right
- Moves the cursor to the beginning of the word to right of cursor.
- Ctrl+End
- Moves the cursor to the end of the document.
- Ctrl+Home
- Moves the cursor to the beginning of the document.
- Ctrl+PgUp
- Moves the cursor to the top of the screen.
- Ctrl+PgDn
- Moves the cursor to the bottom of the screen.
- Alt+Y
- Moves cursor to beginning of marked block.
- Alt+E
- Moves cursor to end of marked block.
- Del
- Deletes the character at the current cursor position.
- Ins
- Switches between insert and replace modes.
- Several EPM Commands also can be used to move the cursor to a new location.
- These are as follows:
-
- #### Moves the cursor to line ####.
-
- +#### Move the cursor forward in the file #### lines.
-
- .-#### Move the cursor back in the file #### lines.
-
- BOTTOM Move the cursor to the bottom of the file.
-
- TOP Move the cursor to the top of the file.
-
- The mouse has the following functions:
-
- Button 1 single click
- Move cursor to mouse.
-
- Button 1 single click and drag
- Block mark as you drag.
-
- Button 2 single click and drag
- Line mark as you drag.
-
- Button 1 + Ctrl-key + drag
- Character mark as you drag.
-
- Button 1 double-click
- UNMARK.
-
- Button 2 double-click
- Move cursor to mouse and MARK the WORD.
-
- Note: Mouse action is configurable via macro language
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.2. Drawing Boxes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- EPM allows you to draw boxes around an area of text using graphic characters.
- To do this it is first necissary to create a block mark. For information on
- creating block marks see Block Marks. When the box is drawn it will encircle
- the area in this block.
-
- After creating the block mark, to insert the box issue the BOX at the EPM
- Command Line followed by one of the following arguments:
-
- 1 thin, single line
- 2 thin, double line
- 3 dotted line
- 4 thick line
- 5 double, thin line horizontally; single, thin line vertically
- 6 double, thin line vertically; single, thin line horizontally
- C creates a box comment using the C language syntax
- P creates a box comment using the Pascal language syntax
- A creates a box comment using Assembler syntax
- E erases the box around the marked area
- R reflows text in marked area
- B places spaces on all sides of the marked area, i.e. creates a box of blank
- spaces
- /character Any character which follows the slash ( / ) will be used to form a
- box.
-
- For example, if you wished surround a marked area with a thick line you would
- enter the following at the EPM Command Line:
-
- BOX 4
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.3. Searching and Replacing ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Procedures and options for searching and replacing text within a file.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.3.1. Searching for Text ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Type in a search command and press the ENTER key.
-
- The search command has the following syntax:
-
- /find-this-string/ [options]
- or L /find-this-string/ [options]
- where the options have the following meaning:
-
- - Search from current line backwards, to top of file or to top of marked area
- if m option chosen, but still searches left to right within each line.
- + Search forward, from current line to bottom of file.
- m Search within the Marked text area only.
- a Search All of the current file.
- c Ignore upper/lower Case of the search string.
- e Do not ignore case, look for Exact matches.
- r Reverse search from Right to left through lines. Default search is left to
- right through lines.
- f Forward search from left to right through lines.
- g Use the grep algorithm. See The grep option.
- x Use the extended grep algorithm. See Extended grep. (EPM 5.60 or above is
- required for the use of extended grep.)
-
- Multiple options may be given at one time.
-
- Examples:
-
- /Word in paragraph/c
- l $/$
-
- In the second example above, '$' is the delimiter and '/' is the string for
- which to search. The default search options (if you specify nothing) are:
-
- 1. search all the file (not only the marked area)
-
- 2. in the forward direction
-
- 3. not ignoring case (requiring exact matches).
-
- The search string delimiter is the first non-blank character after the L. If
- the delimiter is a '/' then th L is optional. If the delimiter is any other
- character, both the L and at least one space following it is required. The same
- is true of the 'C' command.
-
- If you wish to find the next occurrence of the same string, press the Ctrl-F
- key.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.3.2. Searching and Replacing Text ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Type in a change command and press the ENTER key.
-
- The change command has the following syntax, very similar to that for search:
-
- c /find-this-string/replace-with-this/ [options]
- where the options can be one or more of the following characters:
-
- * Change all matching strings.
- - Search from current line backwards, to top of file or to top of marked area
- if m option chosen, but still searches left to right within each line.
- + Search forward, from current line to bottom of file.
- m Search within the Marked text area only.
- a Search All of the current file.
- c Ignore upper/lower Case of the search string.
- e Do not ignore case, look for Exact matches.
- r Reverse search from Right to left through lines. Default search is left to
- right through lines.
- f Forward search from left to right through lines.
- g Use the grep algorithm. See The grep option.
- x Use the extended grep algorithm. See Extended grep. (EPM 5.60 or above is
- required for the use of extended grep.)
-
- It can be seen that these options are the same as those for search, with the
- addition of *.
-
- Multiple options may be given at one time. If contradictory options are given
- (such as ce) the last such option is the one used.
-
- Examples:
- c /mispeled/misspelled/*
- c $/$/*$ (change / to /* )
- c/This/That/e+
- Note: Any search string delimiter may be used (not only slash) after the 'c'
- and at least one blank. The blank is optional if the delimiter is a slash.
-
- If you wish to find the next occurrence of the same string press the Ctrl-F
- key. If you wish to repeat the same change command, issue C without arguments
- or use the Ctrl-C key combination.
-
- If the * option is not used, then only the first occurrence of the search
- string found will be changed. If the * option is used, then all occurrences of
- the search string that are found will be changed. If you wish to change some
- and not others, you can use the Search / Replace dialog, either by selecting it
- from the Options pulldown, or by pressing Ctrl-S to bring it up.
-
- Note: The Grep option only applies to the search string, not to the
- replacement string. If you enter:
-
- c /(.*)/<.*>/ g
- then EPM will find the first occurrence of a left parenthesis, followed by any
- sequence of characters, and ending with a right parenthesis, and replace it
- with the literal string <.*>. It will not change the parentheses to angle
- brackets and leave the enclosed text unchanged. The eXtended grep option can
- be used to do this in EPM 5.60 or above (with slightly different syntax).
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.3.3. The grep option ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- The grep option, '/g', allows you to specify special pattern matching
- characters within the search string. These characters are:
-
- Character: What it matches:
-
- '.' (period)
- matches any character.
-
- '^' (caret)
- matches the beginning of a line.
-
- '$'
- when it follows the search string, it matches the
- end of a line.
-
- '\'character
- matches character; used to override any special
- meaning given to characters.
-
- '['list_of_characters']'
- matches any of the characters in the list.
-
- A list of characters can be indicated as a range
- using the '-' (hyphen). For example, [a-z] will
- match with any letter of the alphabet. If the
- first character after the '[' is a '^', then the
- set is negated, i.e., will match any character
- except those in the set.
-
- '*'
- matches a sequence of 0 or more of whatever
- expression it follows.
-
- '+'
- matches a sequence of 1 or more of whatever
- expression it follows.
-
- Examples will be presented that search the following file:
-
- Contents of file junk.e:
-
- soft
- good junk
- and more
- stuff
- even good
- 123456
- l
- do,re,mi,fa,so,la,ti,do
- $35
-
- --------------------------------------
-
- Example searches using grep:
-
- /l./g
- finds 'la'
-
- /^good/g
- finds only first occurrence of 'good'
-
- /good$/g
- finds only 'even good'
-
- /\$/g
- finds '$35'
-
- /^[m-t]/g
- finds 'soft' and 'stuff'
-
- /^[^adeg]/g
- finds 'soft', 'stuff', '123456', 'l', and '$35'
-
- /^[m-t]+/g
- finds 'soft' and 'stuff'
-
- /^[m-t]*/g
- finds everything
-
- Note: The above examples are as you would enter them on the EPM command line.
- When using the Search dialog, you would enter the search string
- (everything between the '/') in the Search field, and select the Grep
- option in the Options section of the dialog.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.3.4. Extended grep ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- The extended grep option, '/x', allows you to specify special pattern matching
- characters within the search string. This includes all those supported for
- standard grep searches, and the following search string additions:
-
- '\b' matches a backspace character.
-
- '\f' matches a form feed character.
-
- '\n' matches a newline character.
-
- '\r' matches a carriage return character.
-
- '\t' matches a tab character.
-
- '\x'HH matches a character with ASCII code 0xHH.
-
- '\z' matches an ASCII NUL character (0x00).
-
- ':a' matches an alphabetic character; equivalent to [a-zA-Z]
-
- ':c' matches a C language identifier; equivalent to [a-zA-Z_$][a-zA-Z0-9_$]*
-
- ':d' matches a digit; equivalent to [0-9]
-
- ':f' matches a C language function definition; optimized for usage in C tags
- support.
-
- ':n' matches an alphanumeric character; equivalent to [a-zA-Z0-9]
-
- ':o' matches optional whitespace; equivalent to [ \t]*
-
- ':w' matches whitespace; equivalent to [ \t]+
-
- ':x' matches a hexadecimal digit; equivalent to [0-9a-fA-F]
-
- '|' alternation, matches either what appears on the left or what appears on
- the right.
-
- '(' ')' parentheses are used for grouping, and also for creating subexpressions
- for use in the replacement string.
-
- Note: The classes that match more than one character are more efficient than
- the equivalent shown, because (for example) :w will match all whitespace
- as a single unit, whereas [ \t]+ could back up over each matched
- character in an attempt to match what follows in the search string.
-
- Extended grep also adds the following replacement string additions:
-
- '&' represents the entire matched string
-
- '\'n (where n is '0' - '9') represents the corresponding subexpression of
- the matched string. Each subexpression refers to the contents of a
- parenthesized expression, where \1 represents the string matched
- between the first open parenthesis and its corresponding close
- parenthesis, \2 the second, etc., and \0 represents the entire match
- (equivalent to '&').
-
- '\&' represents the '&' character.
-
- '\\' represents the '\' character.
-
- Some examples:
-
- /pro(gram|cedure)/
- matches 'program' or 'procedure'.
-
- /function:o\(/
- matches 'function', optionally followed by spaces or tabs, followed
- by an open parenthesis.
-
- c /id=(:c)/id='\1'/ x*
- changes all strings of the form id=some_string to id='some_string'.
- (I.e., it adds single quotes around the parameter, no matter what it
- was.)
-
- c /(myfunc:o\()([^,]*,)/\1 Global, \2 NULL,/*x
- adds a new first and third parameter to all 'myfunc' calls. The
- first parenthesized expression matches 'myfunc', optional whitespace,
- and an open parenthesis. The second matches everything up to the next
- comma. The replacement string uses both of these, adds ' Global, '
- after the open parenthesis, and adds the string ' NULL,' at the end.
- This would convert 'myfunc(first, second)' to 'myfunc( Global, first,
- NULL, second)'.
-
- Note: EPM 5.60 or above is required for the use of extended grep.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.4. Adding and Multiplying Numbers ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- If you need to add columns or rows of hex, octal or decimal numbers, EPM
- provides both an add and multiply command. Just mark a block of text (Alt-B or
- Alt-L) and issue the ADD or MULT command on EPM command line dialog. Each line
- of text may contain a mathematical expression which is valid input for the math
- command (See Calculating Mathematical Expressions). Steps to operate on a
- column or row of numbers
-
- 1. Highlight the text you wish to add or multiply. This can be accomplished by
- pressing Alt-B once at the top left corner of the column and again at the
- bottom right corner of the column of numbers. When you finish marking the
- end of the text, EPM will highlight the text in between to show you the
- column of text you have marked.
-
- 2. Press Ctrl+I to get to EPM command line dialog.
-
- 3. Type
-
- add or mult
-
- and press ENTER.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.5. Calculating Mathematical Expressions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- If you need to add/subtract/multiply/divide hex, octal, or decimal numbers, EPM
- provides a set of math commands that compute an arithmetic_expression of the
- following syntax: arithmetic_expression: arith_term {arith_operator
- arith_term} arith_term: decimal_number | hexadecimal_number | octal_number '('
- arithmetic_expression ')' arith_operator:
-
- '+' (addition)
- '-' (subtraction)
- '*' (multiplication)
- '/' (division)
- '%' (integer division)
- '//' (remainder)
- Hexadecimal (base 16) numbers must be preceded by a 'x', e.g. x10 = 16. Octal
- (base 8) numbers must be preceded by an 'o', e.g. o12 = 10.
-
- For example, the following can be typed on the command line dialog:
-
- math 123 * 4567
- math 1.2 * 3.45 + 2
-
- math arithmetic_expression
- The math command computes the expression and
- displays the result as a decimal number.
- mathx arithmetic_expression
- The mathx command computes the expression and
- displays the result as a hexadecimal number.
- matho arithmetic_expression
- The matho command computes the expression and
- displays the result as an octal number.
-
- Try some of the following math commands.
-
- math -10 + 40
- mathx -xff + 10
- matho o11 * (xff - 10)
- The above examples would yield 30, xFF0B, and o4325 respectively.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.6. Drawing ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Using graphics characters to draw boxes and diagrams is easy in EPM. The DRAW
- command can be typed at the command line dialog, or F6 can be pressed. If you
- invoke the command without any parameters, the visual representations of the
- parameters: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, B, or /any char will appear in the editor message
- line. To enable drawing mode, you must issue the draw command with one of these
- parameters. For example,
-
- Draw 2
- You are now in draw mode, which means that the cursor becomes like a paint
- brush: everywhere you move the cursor, a double line is drawn. If you want to
- draw a box, trace the shape with the cursor using the arrow keys (Left, Right,
- Up and Down).
-
- If you want to enter text or wish to move the cursor without drawing anything,
- i.e. lift the paint brush, press the Ins key. This will suspend the drawing
- without exiting draw mode. To begin drawing again, simply press the Ins key
- again. Pressing any key besides those on the numeric keypad, will cause draw
- mode to end.
-
- You can also draw figures with characters other than the line graphics
- characters provided. By typing the following on the command line:
-
- Draw /(
- you could draw figures composed of left parentheses. This will work with any
- character on the keyboard, as long as you precede the character by a slash (/).
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.7. Mini-Macros - Keystroke Sequences ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- You can record (Ctrl-R) and play back (Ctrl-T) a sequence of keystrokes. Such a
- recorded sequence constitutes a temporary mini-macro which can be repeatedly
- executed. Any time you find yourself entering the same key sequence more than
- twice, think of recording them. The keystroke recording is retained until you
- change it by making a new recording, or until you leave the editor.
-
- To record a sequence of keys, press Ctrl-R. You'll be prompted:
-
- Remembering keys.
- Ctrl-R to finish, Ctrl-T to finish and try, Ctrl-C to cancel.
- Type your sequence of keys. Virtually any key can be recorded, including Esc to
- switch to the command line dialog. (However, anything typed into the command
- line isn't seen by the recorder.) The keys will be executed as you're typing.
- Press Ctrl-R again to finish the recording. If you wish to cancel, press Ctrl-C
- instead.
-
- Whenever you wish to replay the sequence, press Ctrl-T. Notice that you can
- also press Ctrl-T during the recording. This is only a shortcut; it has the
- same effect as pressing Ctrl-R to finish the recording and Ctrl-T to replay it
- immediately.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.8. Entering Control and Graphic Characters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- You can enter PC graphic characters (those with extended ASCII codes greater
- than 127) with Alt-keypad numbers. For example, to enter the symbol for the
- Greek character pi (represented by the code 227), hold down the Alt key, type
- 227 on the numeric keypad, and release the Alt key.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.9. Syntax-Directed Editing Features ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- EPM provides syntax directed editing for PASCAL, C, Rexx and E files. When the
- Enter key or Space bar is pressed, EPM looks at the first word in the line and
- keys in the rest of the structure if it understands it. Structure expansion
- includes if statements, loops, case statements, and comments. Typical
- syntax-directed editing features may be demonstrated by the following sequence:
-
- edit newfile.c (edit a new file called newfile.c)
-
- Type characters indicated below
-
- main<space bar>
- if<space bar>
-
- Pressing the <space bar> in both instances above should have inserted the rest
- of the main and if structures. If you find automatic expansion distracting you
- can turn it off. See the EXPAND command and the MY_EXPAND_ON configuration
- option. If you prefer, you can omit syntax assist for any language by using
- the C_SYNTAX_ASSIST, E_SYNTAX_ASSIST, P_SYNTAX_ASSIST, or REXX_SYNTAX_ASSIST
- constants, or for all of them with ALTERNATE_KEYSETS.
-
- Ctrl-X expands syntax even if the syntax expansion option is off, as long as
- support was compiled in for that language.
-
- EPM will automatically expand the syntax of the Pascal, C and E languages
- according to the file's filename extension. For example, if the user edits a
- file called test.e, the editor knows this file will contain E language
- programs.
-
- Box comments can also be created easily according to the syntax particular to
- the language. For more information, refer the BOX command entry.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.10. Stream Versus Line Mode ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- There are two basic types of editors for editing text files, a stream editor
- and a line editor. A stream editor treats the file as one long stream of text.
- A line editor treats the file as a series of individual lines, separated by a
- line end character.
-
- Stream mode
- In a stream editor, a new-line character (generally an ASCII
- line-feed character) is treated like any other character. It can be
- inserted into the text stream, breaking the line into two at that
- point, or it can be deleted from the text stream, joining the two
- lines on either side of it. As you move the cursor left and right,
- when it passes the beginning or end of one line, it moves to the end
- or beginning of the next - because although you see individual lines
- on the display, it's actually one long stream internally. Also, when
- you move the cursor up and down, if you move it over a shorter line,
- the cursor bounces to the left; if you continue moving it up or down
- to a longer line, it bounces back to the original column.
- Line mode
- The Enhanced Editor is a line editor. If you move the cursor left or
- right, it stays on that line. You can move the cursor beyond the end
- of the line. If you do so, and then start typing text, the editor
- will fill in spaces between the previous end of the line and the
- characters you have added. Since the new-line character does not
- actually exist in the file once loaded, there is no concept of
- inserting or deleting a new-line. Pressing the Enter key (by
- default; another key can be chosen) adds a new line after the current
- line, but it doesn't split the line; it adds a new, empty line
- between the current line and the following line, regardless of the
- cursor position.
-
- Since some users are accustomed to using a stream-mode editor, the Enhanced
- Editor can be configured to act like one.
-
- Related Information:
-
- Enabling stream-mode editing
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.11. Enabling Stream-Mode Editing ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- To enable stream-mode editing:
-
- 1. Select Options.
- 2. Select Preferences.
- 3. Select Stream editing.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9. The Action Bar Pull-Down Menus ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- In this section each action bar menu is pictured. Below each picture is a
- description of the menu options.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.1. File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- The file pull down menu list actions to be done on files. For more information
- on loading files see Adding Files to an Edit Ring. The File action bar menu
- contains the following entries:
-
- New
- Replaces the current file with a new file named .Untitled. You must
- name the file by using Rename. If the current file has been
- modified, you will be asked if you want to save it before continuing.
-
- Open .Untitled
- Opens a new edit window with .Untitled used as the file name.
-
- Open...
- Opens a new edit window. A window appears, in which you can type the
- names of one or more files. If you select Open without typing a
- name, .Untitled is used as the file name.
-
- Import text file...
- Retrieves a file and inserts it into the current file being edited.
- The file is inserted starting after the current line.
-
- A window appears, in which you can type the name of the desired file.
-
- Add file...
- Add files to the current edit window. A window appears, in which you
- can type the name of one or more files.
-
- Rename
- Changes the name of the file being edited. A window appears ready
- for you type a file name.
-
- Save
- Stores the current file on disk.
-
- Save as...
- Assigns a name to the current file, then stores the file on disk. It
- is equivalent to Rename followed by Save.
-
- Save and quit
- Stores the current file and, if there were no errors storing it,
- removes the file from the edit window. If this is the only file in
- the current edit window, the window closes.
-
- Quit
- Removes the current file from the edit window. If there are unsaved
- changes, you are asked if you wish to save the changes, discard them,
- or cancel the Quit. When you quit the last file in the edit window,
- the window closes.
-
- Print file...
- Prints the current file.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.2. Edit ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- The Edit action bar menu contains the following entries:
-
- Undo line
- Reverses any changes that you just typed on the current line. If you
- select this in error, you can immediately select it again to redo the
- changes. Once you move the cursor off the line, the changes are
- committed and you cannot use Undo line to remove them, instead; you
- must use Undo.
-
- Undo...
- Displays a window which allows you step through the changes you have
- made to the file.
-
- Copy
- Copies the marked text to the clipboard.
-
- Cut
- Copies the marked text to the clipboard, and then deletes it from
- EPM.
-
- Paste
- Inserts text from the clipboard into the current file, following the
- cursor position. The text from the clipboard is treated as a
- character mark - that is it is treated as a stream of text, possibly
- containing embedded line breaks, rather than as a series of lines.
-
- Paste lines
- Copies text from the clipboard into the current file, following the
- cursor position. Each line of text in the clipboard is added as a
- new line in EPM.
-
- Paste block
- Inserts text from the clipboard into the current file, following the
- cursor position. The clipboard text is treated as a block mark,
- surrounded by the smallest possible bounding rectangle.
-
- Style...
- Changes the font or color of the marked text.
-
- Copy mark
- Copies the marked text to the current cursor position.
-
- Move mark
- Moves the marked text to the current cursor position.
-
- Overlay mark
- Overwrites the text at the current cursor position with a copy of the
- marked text.
-
- Adjust mark
- Overwrites the text at the current cursor position with the marked
- text and leaves blanks in place of the source text.
-
- Unmark
- Removes any mark that exists in this window. The marked text is not
- changed.
-
- Delete mark
- Erases the marked text. If the mark is a block mark, the text that
- is marked is erased, but the space remains in the file.
-
- Push mark
- Saves the location of a mark. You can then select Unmark, mark other
- text, manipulate it, and then select Pop mark to restore the original
- mark.
-
- Note: Only the boundary of the mark is saved, not the contents.
-
- Pop mark
- Restores the location of a previous mark.
-
- Swap mark
- Exchanges the current mark with the topmost mark on the stack (the
- most recently pushed mark).
-
- Push cursor
- Saves the current cursor position. You can later select Pop cursor
- to jump back to the same place in the same file.
-
- Pop cursor
- Restores the previous cursor position.
-
- Swap cursor
- Exchanges the current cursor position with the topmost position on
- the stack (the most recently pushed position).
-
- Note: The above 6 entries will only be present if Stack Commands is
- enabled on the Preferences menu, or if they are configured in
- with the WANT_STACK_CMDS option.
-
- Print mark...
- Prints a copy of the marked text.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.3. Search ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- See Searching and Replacing for more information about searching and replacing
- text. The Search action bar menu contains the following entries:
-
- Search
- Displays the Search window, which enables you to search through the
- file or change one string to another.
-
- Find next
- Repeats the previous Find command.
-
- Change next
- Repeats the previous Change command.
-
- Bookmarks
- A cascade menu which has the following choices:
-
- Set... Displays a window that enables you to create a bookmark at the
- current cursor position.
- List... Displays a list of bookmarks for the current file. You can place
- the cursor at a particular bookmark by selecting it from the list.
- Next Places the cursor at the next bookmark.
- Previous Places the cursor at the previous bookmark.
-
- Tags
- A cascade menu which has the following choices:
-
- Find current procedure Looks up the procedure at the cursor position in the
- tags file; if found, positions you in the source file where that
- procedure is defined.
- Find procedure... As above, but presents an entry field where you can type
- in the name of a procedure to be located.
- Tags file name... Displays (and lets you change) the name of the tags file
- in use.
- Make tags file... Presents a dialog in which you can enter a list of source
- files, in order to create or update the current tags file.
-
- Note: The Tags menu is present only in EPM 5.60 or above, and only
- if the WANT_TAGS configuration option is set. See the EPM 5.60
- / 6.00 online help for a description of what tags files are.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.4. Options ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- The Options action bar menu contains the following entries:
-
- List ring...
- Lists the files in the edit ring. From the list, you can select any
- file and make it the current file.
-
- Proof
- Spell-checks the file or marked area.
-
- Proof word
- Spell-checks the word at the cursor position.
-
- Synonym
- Displays a list of synonyms for the word at the cursor position.
-
- Note: LEXAM.DLL is required to be in the LIBPATH for the above 3
- options to work. If CHECK_FOR_LEXAM is set in the
- configuration file, these menu selections will not be
- displayed if LEXAM.DLL is missing.
-
- Preferences
- Switchs edit-window options or displays the Settings window.
-
- Settings Displays a window, from which you can change editor configuration
- settings (such as color and fonts).
- Advanced marking Switchs between the basic marking mode and the advanced EPM
- marking mode. The mode of marking that you use affects the way
- your mouse works.
- Stream editing Switchs between stream-mode and line-mode editing.
- Ring enabled Allows multiple files to exist in the edit ring. The edit ring
- always exists, but unless you select this option, the editor
- prevents you from loading more than one file at a time into it.
-
- A check mark appears next to this choice if it is currently
- active.
- Stack commands Controls whether the stack-related commands are present on
- the Edit menu.
- CUA accelerators Toggles whether the Alt+letter keys corresponding to action
- bar mnemonics perform the EPM-defined actions or whether they
- activate the corresponding menu item.
-
- Note: If the configuration options are set such that nothing would
- be on the Preferences menu but Settings, then Settings is
- instead displayed on the main Options menu in place of
- Preferences.
-
- Autosave...
- Displays the autosave file name and the number of changed lines per
- autosave. You can also list the autosave directory.
-
- Messages...
- Allows you to review displayed editor messages.
-
- Frame controls
- Configures various edit window frame controls.
-
- Status line Switchs the status line on and off.
- Message line Switchs the message line on and off.
- Scrollbars Toggles the scroll bars on and off.
- Rotate buttons Switchs the rotate buttons on and off.
- Info at top Switchs the position of the Information window between the top
- and the bottom of the edit window. The information window is
- composed of the status line and the message line.
- Prompting Toggles whether prompts are displayed when menu choices are
- selected. Displaying the prompts forces the Information window to
- be displayed at the bottom of the edit window instead of at the
- top.
-
- Note: The menu prompting is done through an internal command that
- is called whenever a menu choice is selected. Therefore,
- the prompting will not appear while another command is
- processing. This ensures that you will always be able to
- select Halt command to stop processing.
-
- Save options
- Stores the current settings of the frame controls, Preferences
- options, the size and position of the edit window, and a few command
- settings (PROFILE, LONGNAMES, TABKEY and ESCAPEKEY). The next time an
- edit window is opened, these same settings are used.
-
- Book icon
- Activates EPM book icon, from which you can close EPM or list all
- edit windows.
-
- Note: This selection is only present if SUPPORT_BOOK_ICON is set in
- the configuration file.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.5. Command ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- The command menu allows access to the command line dialog. Commands that can be
- entered are listed in the EPMCommands Described section. The Command action bar
- menu contains the following entries:
-
- Command dialog
- Brings up the EPM Command Line dialog box.
-
- Halt command
- Stops the execution of the current command.
-
- Create shell
- Creates a command shell, an OS/2 command prompt where you can type
- commands. The output appears in an edit window while other programs
- are running.
-
- Write to shell
- Writes a string to the command shell. The string is generally a
- command, but can also be the response to a prompt in the shell
- window.
-
- Note: The Create shell and the Write to shell menu choices only apear if a
- SHELL command has been given.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.6. Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- EPM includes two types of help. You can browse the EPMHELP.HLP file, which
- lists the basic commands and key definitions, or you can use the Help Manager
- to view help panels containing hypertext links. Pressing F1 will place you in
- the Help Manager viewing the EPM help Table of Contents.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10. The Function Keys ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- The function keys are designed to perform a series of actions or tasks when you
- press them. The function keys are bound to the most common editorial tasks, so
- that you may perform these tasks with one simple push of a button. The
- following sections contain a discussion of the action performed when one of the
- function keys is pressed in any of the shift states.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.1. F1-F12 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- This section explains the actions of the 12 base function keys F1 to F12 as
- implemented in the standard EPM package.
-
- F1=Help
- The F1 key brings up the Help Manager, displaying the
- Contents page for EPM help.
-
- F2=Save
- To save the current file without exiting, press the F2 key.
-
- F3=Quit
- The F3 key will remove your file's text from the file ring
- without saving it. If your file has been modified, you will
- be asked whether you really wish to throw away the changes.
- When you quit from the last (visible) file of the last
- ring, you will exit to OS/2.
-
- F4=Save & Quit
- To save your file and remove it from the file ring press
- F4. When you quit from the last (visible) file of the last
- ring, you will exit to OS/2.
-
- F5=Open
- To start editing a file on a new ring press F5, type the
- filename, and press Enter. The ESC key will cancel the
- request. You can enter more than one filename separated by
- a space, and can specify wild cards in filenames like *.doc
- or *.c.
-
- F6=Draw
- To start drawing text graphics press F6. Then type a number
- (1 through 6), B for blank, or / followed by any character.
- You will be able to create or erase text graphic drawings
- by moving around with the cursor keys. See section Drawing
- Lines for more information.
-
- F7=Name
- To change the name of the file you are editing press F7,
- type the new name and press enter. This does not change the
- name of the previous copy on disk; it changes the name the
- file will next be saved under. Renaming is a good way to
- start a revised copy without losing the original file.
-
- F8=Edit
- To edit another file on the same ring press F8, type the
- filename, and press Enter. The ESC key will cancel the
- request. You can enter more than one filename separated by
- a space and wild cards are allowed in filenames. Press the
- F11 and F12 (or Ctrl-N and Ctrl-P) keys to switch between
- the files you are editing.
-
- F9=Undo
- If you mistype a change to a line, you can restore its
- original contents by pressing F9. Undo does not restore
- deleted lines or changes to multiple lines. Only the
- current line you are editing can be restored.
-
- F10=Action Bar
- Press F10 to toggle between the action bar and the text.
- Pressing and releasing Alt without combining it with any
- other keystrokes will also toggle between the action bar
- and the text.
-
- Note: F10 no longer moves to the next file in the ring.
- Use F11/F12 or Ctrl-N/Ctrl-P to change between files.
-
- F11=Previous
- If you have loaded multiple files (F8 key or Edit command)
- in a ring press F11 to switch to the previous file in the
- ring.
-
- F12=Next
- If you have loaded multiple files (F8 key or Edit command)
- in a ring press F12 to switch to the next file in the ring.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2. Alt-F1 - Alt-F12 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- This section explains the actions performed when the Alt key and one of the 12
- function keys is pressed simultaneously. Not all Alt-Fn keys have a specific
- action bound to them. The following is a description of those keys that do
- perform some function.
-
- Alt-F1=LineChars
- The Alt-F1 key prints all the characters with which you can
- draw a line or box. This line of characters is printed at
- the cursor location.
-
- Alt-F7=ShiftWindow
- To move EPM editor window use the Alt-F7 key combination to
- pickup the window, the arrow keys to move the window, and
- the enter key to drop the window.
-
- Alt-F8=SizeWindow
- To resize EPM editor window use the Alt-F8 key combination
- to enter the size mode, the arrow keys to enlarge/shrink
- the window, and the enter key to enact the changes. The
- first arrow key movement determines which side will be
- altered. For instance, to shrink the left boundary, the
- user would type Alt-F8, the left arrow key, as many right
- arrow keys as needed, and then the enter key to enact the
- size change.
-
- Alt-F9=Minimize
- To minimize (iconize) the current EPM session use the
- Alt-F9 combination.
-
- Alt-F10=Maximize
- To maximize (enlarge EPM screen) use the Alt-F10
- combination.
-
- Note: The Alt-F10 key combination is no longer used to switch between files in
- a ring. Instead use F11 or Ctrl-P to move to the previous file in a ring and
- F12 or Ctrl-N to move to the next file in a ring.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.3. Shift-F1 - Shift-F12 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- This section explains the actions performed when the Shift key and one of the
- 12 function keys is pressed simultaneously. Not all Shift-Fn keys have a
- specific action bound to them. The following is a description of those keys
- that do perform some function. All the Shift-Fn keys control screen scrolling.
- This is different from the cursor movement keys, because scrolling causes the
- contents of the screen to be moved while the cursor remains stationery.
-
- Shift-F1=ScrlLeft
- The Shift-F1 key scrolls the screen to the left.
-
- Shift-F2=ScrlRight
- The Shift-F2 key scrolls the screen to the right.
-
- Shift-F3=ScrlDown
- The Shift-F3 key scrolls the screen down.
-
- Shift-F4=ScrlUp
- The Shift-F4 key scrolls the screen up.
-
- Shift-F5=CenterLine
- The Shift-F5 key scrolls the screen so that the line that
- the cursor is on is centered vertically.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4. Ctrl-F1 - Ctrl-F12 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- This section explains the actions performed when the Ctrl key and one of the 12
- function keys is pressed simultaneously. Not all Ctrl-Fn keys have a specific
- action bound to them. The following is a description of those keys that do
- perform some function.
-
- Ctrl-F1=UpperWord
- The Ctrl-F1 key converts a word to entirely uppercase
- letters. The word is specified by placing the cursor
- anywhere on the word before pressing the Ctrl-F1 key.
-
- Ctrl-F2=LowerWord
- The Ctrl-F2 key converts a word to entirely lowercase
- letters. The word is specified by placing the cursor
- anywhere on the word before pressing the Ctrl-F2 key.
-
- Ctrl-F3=UpperMark
- The Ctrl-F3 key converts all text in a marked area to
- entirely uppercase letters.
-
- Ctrl-F4=LowerMark
- The Ctrl-F4 key converts all text in a marked area to
- entirely lowercase letters.
-
- Ctrl-F5=BeginWord
- The Ctrl-F5 key moves the cursor to the first character of
- the word upon which the cursor is presently placed.
-
- Ctrl-F6=EndWord
- The Ctrl-F6 key moves the cursor to the last character of
- the word upon which the cursor is presently placed.
-
- Ctrl-F7=Shift mark left
- The Ctrl-F7 key moves a marked area left.
-
- Ctrl-F8=Shift mark right
- The Ctrl-F8 key moves a marked area right.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 11. Key Definitions Summary ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- --- Function keys ---------------------------------------------
- Unshifted Alternate Shifted Ctrl
- --------- --------- ------- ----
- F1 Help menu Show draw chars Scroll left Uppercase word
- F2 Save and continue Scroll right Lowercase word
- F3 Quit w/o save Scroll down Uppercase mark
- F4 Save and quit Close EPM Window Scroll up Lowercase mark
- F5 Edit in new ring Restore Window Center line vrt. Crsr to bgn wrd
- F6 Draw Crsr to end wrd
- F7 Change filename Move EPM window Move area left
- F8 Edit new file Size EPM window Move area right
- F9 Undo cur. line Minimize
- F10 Goto action bar Maximize
- F11 Previous file
- F12 Next file
- --- Alt keys --------------------------------------------------
- Alt-A : Adjust marked area, blank old Alt-O : Overlay blocked area
- Alt-B : mark Block Alt-P : reformat following Paragraph
- Alt-C : Copy mark Alt-Q :
- Alt-D : Delete marked area Alt-R : Reflow marked area
- Alt-E : cursor to End of marked area Alt-S : Split line at cursor
- Alt-F : Fill marked area Alt-T : cenTer Text in marked block
- Alt-G : Alt-U : Unmark
- Alt-H : Alt-V :
- Alt-I : Alt-W : mark Word
- Alt-J : Join (with following line)
- Alt-K : Alt-Y : cursor to beginning of mark
- Alt-L : mark Line Alt-Z : mark, character mode
- Alt-M : Move marked area Alt-1 : Edit filename on current line
- Alt-N : keyin file Name at cursor Alt-= : Execute the current line
- -- Ctrl keys -------------------------------------------------
- Ctrl-A : Ctrl-N : Next file in ring
- Ctrl-B : list Bookmarks Ctrl-O : Open file
- Ctrl-C : Change next occurrence Ctrl-P : Previous file in ring
- Ctrl-D : Delete word Ctrl-Q : Toggle for ALL /search_string/
- Ctrl-E : Erase to end of line Ctrl-R : Record remembered key sequence
- Ctrl-F : repeat previous Find command Ctrl-S : pop Search dialog
- Ctrl-G : list edit rinG Ctrl-T : play remembered key sequence
- Ctrl-H : keyword Help Ctrl-U :
- Ctrl-I : Goto EPM Command Line Ctrl-V :
- Ctrl-J : Ctrl-W :
- Ctrl-K : duplicate line Ctrl-X : force syntaX expansion
- Ctrl-L : copy Line to cmd line dialog Ctrl-Y : change stYle
- Ctrl-M : insert line; keep cursor pos.Ctrl-Z :
- Ctrl-2 : inserts ASCII null Ctrl-Bkspc : delete line
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12. EPM Commands ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Commands which may be executed from the EPM Command Line.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.1. The EPM Command Line Dialog ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- EPM editor has a command line dialog used to issue internal commands and
- external macros. The command line dialog is invoked by pressing Ctrl+I or from
- the Command pulldown menu of the action bar. You may retrieve previous commands
- you have typed by pressing the up and down arrow keys (or using the mouse)
- while the cursor is in the dialog box.
-
- As you type a command, the editor will attempt to match what you're typing with
- an existing line in the selection list. At any point you can press Ctrl+O to
- select the matched line in the list, or Ctrl+F to find the next matching line.
- Ctrl+Backspace will delete the line from the list.
-
- The standard commands are shown in the next section. If you enter something
- other than one of these commands, EPM will pass the command line to the
- operating system for interpretation. When a command is issued, the editor
- searches for the executable code for the command in the following order:
-
- 1. user-defined command (a command defined by the user in a .E file using a
- DEFC construct and compiled into an .EX. file)
-
- 2. built-in command internal to the editor (i.e. those listed in the following
- section)
-
- 3. an external program, which is searched for according to the same rules as
- OS/2:
-
- a. looks for a .EXE or a .CMD file in current directory
-
- b. looks for a .EXE or a .CMD file in the directories listed in the PATH
- environment variable.
-
- In the next section upper case letters are to be taken literally, (i.e. should
- be entered as shown, but may be entered in either upper or lower case). Lower
- case words are descriptive, telling what kind of information is to be filled
- in. For example, the word filespec means any valid OS/2 file specification,
- d:\path\filename.ext. If the drive and path are omitted, the current values are
- assumed.
-
- The following symbols are used to describe the syntax of EPM commands more
- precisely:
-
- { }
- Zero or more repetitions of what is enclosed in the brackets.
-
- [ ]
- Zero or one of what is enclosed in the brackets.
-
- A | B
- Choice of either A OR B.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2. EPM Commands Described ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Detailed descriptions of all valid EPM Commands.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.1. #### (Go to line ####) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- ####
-
- Goes to line number ####.
-
- Example:
-
- 321
-
- Places the cursor on line 321.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.2. + [####] (Go ahead #### lines) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- +####
-
- Moves forward (down) #### lines. If no number is specified, the cursor goes to
- the bottom of file.
-
- Example:
-
- +42
-
- Moves the cursor ahead 42 lines.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.3. - [####] (Go back #### lines) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- -####
-
- Moves backward (up) #### lines. If no number is specified, the cursor goes to
- the top of file.
-
- Example:
-
- -13
-
- Moves the cursor back 13 lines.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.4. /pattern/ - + M A C E R F G (Search for Text) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Same as the L command. This / form saves a couple of keystrokes if the search
- string does not itself contain a slash. Refer to the L command for more
- information.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.5. ACTIVATE_ACCEL (Activate an Accelerator Table) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- ACTIVATE_ACCEL [table_name]
-
- Use ACTIVATE_ACCEL in a Rexx macro to activate the named accelerator table. If
- no name is given, the current accelerator table (which could have been updated
- with the BUILDACCEL command) is rebuilt.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.6. ADD (Add Marked Numbers) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- ADD
-
- Adds the marked block containing numeric expressions. See Adding and Multipling
- Numbers.
-
- Example:
-
- 1
- 2
- 3 4
-
- If this text was marked and the ADD command was issued, the end result would
- be:
-
- 1
- 2
- 3 4
- 10
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.7. ALL (Search Entire File) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- ALL /search_string[/c]
-
- Will create a new file showing all occurrences of the search string given. The
- search string should be sandwiched between two delimiters (shown here as
- slashes). The C option cause ALL to ignore the case in the search. For example:
-
- ALL /find me/
- ALL $and/or$c
- The first example will find all occurrences of the text find me The second
- example will find all occurrences of the text and/or. The c option is invoked
- on the second example, meaning that the text and/or can appear in any
- combinations of upper and lowercase, whereas find me must be in lower case.
-
- All lines with the search string located somewhere in the line will be listed
- in a separate file in the ring called .ALL.
-
- The key Ctrl+Q is set up so that if you press it while in the .ALL file, it
- will position you on the corresponding line in the original file. If you are
- not in .ALL, you will be placed there and the cursor will be moved down one
- line. This enables you to rapidly switch from .ALL to succeeding lines of the
- original.
-
- To use this command EPM.E must have been compiled with the variable WANT_ALL
- set to TRUE in your MYCNF.E file.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.8. APPEND,APP (Append Text to File) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- APPEND filename
-
- Appends marked text to the file filename. If no text is marked, the entire
- current file is taken as the source. See PUT for more details.
-
- Example:
-
- APPEND D:\HOTEL\FAULTY.DAT
-
- Appends the marked text to the file FAULTY.DAT which is located in the HOTEL
- directory of drive D.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.9. ASC (Determine ASCII values) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- ASC char
-
- Will determine the ASCII value of the char specified. This command is the
- opposite of the CHR command.
-
- Example:
-
- ASC *
-
- Returns the ASCII value of *. In this case this would appear in the message
- line:
-
- asc *=42
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.10. AUTOSAVE (Set/View Autosave Values) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- AUTOSAVE [ #### | ON | OFF | ? ]
-
- Saves the current file to a temporary file after #### number of modifications.
- If a number or on is specified, the name of the temporary file is shown. If ?
- is the parameter, the current autosave value (####) is displayed. Off stops the
- feature until the next Autosave ON or #### command.
-
- Note: These temporary files are saved in case of system or power failure. They
- are deleted as soon as you exit from the editor.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.11. BM, SETMARK (Set Bookmarks) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- BM | SETMARK [bookmark_name [ class [line [col] ] ] ]
- Sets a bookmark. If no arguments are given, the bookmark will be set the the
- current cursor position and a dialog box will appear prompting you for the name
- of the bookmark.
-
- The first argument, if given, will be used as the name of the bookmark to be
- created. The second argument is a flag which determines whether the bookmark
- is permanent (4) or temporary and can also be userd to group bookmarks. The
- DeleteBMClass command can be used to delete all bookmarks with the same class.
- The third argument is the line number where you wish the bookmark to be
- located. The final argument is the column number.
-
- Examples:
-
- BM introduction 1
-
- Sets a permanent bookmark named introduction at the current cursor position.
-
- SETMARK marker 0 5 1
-
- Sets a temporary bookmark named marker at line 5 and column 1.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.12. BOTTOM, BOT (Move to Bottom of File) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- BOTTOM | BOT | +
-
- Moves to bottom of file.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.13. BOX (Draw Box) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- BOX 1|2|3|4|5|6|C|P|A|E|R|B|S|/character
-
- Draws a box around a marked text block. The options will be listed on screen if
- the BOX command is issued with no parameter. The options are :
-
- 1 thin, single line
- 2 thin, double line
- 3 dotted line
- 4 thick line
- 5 double, thin line horizontally; single, thin line vertically
- 6 double, thin line vertically; single, thin line horizontally
- C creates a box comment using the C language syntax
- P creates a box comment using the Pascal language syntax
- A creates a box comment using Assembler syntax
- E erases the box around the marked area
- R reflows text in marked area
- B places spaces on all sides of the marked area, i.e. creates a box of
- blank spaces
- S creates a box comment using Script (Document Composition Facility)
- Comments
- /character Any character which follows the slash ( / ) will be used to form a
- box.
-
- Note: If you wish to create an E-style comment box, use the C option.
-
- Example:
-
- BOX C
-
- Will draw a C style comment box which will look something like this:
-
- /**************/
- /* */
- /**************/
-
- Note: Styles 5 and 6 use characters that are used as national support
- characters, and may not look right in character sets other than the US
- Code Page.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.14. BROWSE (Allow Updates to File Toggle) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- BROWSE ON | OFF | ?
-
- The browse command allows the user to determine whether the file can be updated
- or not. The options are:
-
- ON
- the file can only be read, and not updated
- OFF
- the file can be both read and updated
- ?
- the browse status (ON or OFF) can be determined.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.15. BUILDACCEL (Build Accelerator Table Entry) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- BUILDACCEL table flags key index command
-
- Use BUILDACCEL to add an accelerator table entry to an accelerator. table is
- the name of the table to be updated; use '*' to indicate the currently active
- accelerator table. flags is a combination of flags corresponding to the AF_
- constants in PMWIN.H in the OS/2 Toolkit, keys is an ASCII key value if flags =
- AF_CHAR; a VK_ constant from PMWIN.H if flags = AF_VIRTUALKEY, etc. (See the
- EPM Technical Reference for further details.) index is a unique number (unique
- in the active menu as well as the active accelerator table), and command is the
- command to be executed when the key is pressed.
-
- /* Rexx example of accelerator key definition */
- AF_CHAR = 1 /* key style constants */
- AF_VIRTUALKEY = 2
- AF_SCANCODE = 4
- AF_SHIFT = 8
- AF_CONTROL = 16
- AF_ALT = 32
- AF_LONEKEY = 64
-
- VK_F1 = 32
- VK_ALT = 11
-
- 'buildaccel *' (AF_CHAR + AF_CONTROL) 122 9300 'sayerror Ctrl+z pressed'
- /* ASCII 122 = 'z' */
- 'buildaccel *' (AF_CHAR + AF_CONTROL) 90 9301 'sayerror Ctrl+Z pressed'
- /* ASCII 90 = 'Z' */
- 'buildaccel *' (AF_VIRTUALKEY + AF_ALT) VK_F1 9302 'qtime'
- /* Alt+F1 tells the time */
- 'buildaccel * (AF_VIRTUALKEY + AF_LONEKEY) VK_ALT 9303 'sayerror F10 = action bar'
- /* Block Alt key from going to the action bar. */
- 'activateaccel' /* No argument => use current table name. */
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.16. BUILDMENUITEM (Add Menu Item to Pulldown) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- BUILDMENUITEM menuname submenuid menuitemid submenutext attrib helppanel e_command
-
- Use BUILDMENUITEM in a Rexx macro to add menu items to an action bar pulldown.
- Buildmenuitem adds a menu item to the pulldown with ID submenuid in the menu
- named menuname. The text displayed on the pulldown will be submenutext (which
- can not contain spaces). The attribute will be attrib (see the menu calls in
- the OS/2 Technical Reference for the various attributes, or just use 0), the
- help panel resid that will be displayed if the user presses F1 while the menu
- item is selected is helppanel (0 if no help for that menu item), and e_command
- is the command that will be executed if that menu item is selected. All the
- menuitemid's must be unique.
-
- /* Rexx sample .erx file - adds "RexxInterface" to the action bar, */
- /* with two menu entries under it. */
- 'buildsubmenu default 1990 RexxInterface 0 0'
- 'buildmenuitem default 1990 1991 AddCommentFields 0 0 rx comment'
- 'buildmenuitem default 1990 1992 ShowRexxDateFormats 0 0 rx rxdates'
- 'showmenu default'
-
- The submenuids for the standard menus (defined in STDMENU.E) are:
-
- File 2
- Edit 8
- Search 3
- Options 4
- Command 1
- Help 6
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.17. BUILDSUBMENU (Build an Action Bar Pulldown) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- BUILDSUBMENU menuname submenuid submenutext attrib helppanel e_command
-
- Use BUILDSUBMENU in a Rexx macro to create a new action bar entry. Buildsubmenu
- adds a pulldown to the action bar menu named menuname, as submenu number
- submenuid. The text displayed on the action bar will be submenutext (which can
- not contain spaces), the attribute will be attrib (see the menu calls in the
- OS/2 Technical Reference for the various attributes, or just use 0), the help
- panel resid that will be displayed if the user presses F1 while the menu item
- is selected is helppanel (0 if no help for that menu item), and e_command is
- the command that will be executed if that menu item is selected. It should be
- blank (omitted) if you want to define a pull-down; if a command is defined in
- the Buildsubmenu opcode then it will act immediately. If no command is
- defined, then the pull-down menu presented will be all the menu items added via
- Buildmenuitem calls that specified the same submenuid.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.18. CD (Change Current Directory) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- CD [path]
-
- If path is specified, changes current directory to path. If no path is
- specified, the current directory is shown as a message.
-
- Note: The CD command is not quite equivalent to the OS/2 CD command. In EPM
- the drive can be changed by issuing a CD command. For instance, even if you
- were in the directory: D:\EDIT\EPM, the following would work:
-
- cd e:\masm\files
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.19. CHANGE,C (Search and Replace Text) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- CHANGE | C /find_string/replace_with/ [-|+|*|M|A|C|E|R|F|G|X]
-
- Changes the find_string to the replace_with string. The '/' may be changed to
- any character; the first character after the 'C' and at least one space is used
- as the string delimiter. (The space is optional if the delimiter is a '/'.) The
- third delimiter is needed only if options are specified.
-
- OPTION EFFECT
-
- - Search from current line backwards, to top of file or to top of marked
- area if m option chosen, but still searches left to right within each
- line.
-
- + Search forward, from current line to bottom of file.
-
- * Change all occurrences
-
- M Search within the Marked text area only.
-
- A Search All of the current file.
-
- C Ignore upper/lower Case of the search string.
-
- E Do not ignore case, look for Exact matches.
-
- R Search from Right to left through lines. Default search is left to right
- through lines.
-
- F Search from left to right through lines.
-
- G Use the grep algorithm. See The grep option.
- (See Steps to Search for a String and Replace It with Another for details.)
-
- Example:
-
- C /dead parrot/slug/*
-
- Will replace all of the occurrences of the string dead parrot with slug.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.20. CENTER (Center Text) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- CENTER
-
- If one or more lines are marked, centers the text on each marked line within
- the current margins. If a block is marked, the text in the block is centered
- within the limits of the block. If nothing is marked, centers the current line
- within the margins.
-
- Example:
-
- This isn't a lymrick
- 'cause ya can't sing it.
-
- If the above text was marked and the CENTER command was issued the result would
- look like this:
-
- This isn't a lymrick
- 'cause ya can't sing it.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.21. CHR (Returns ASCII Character) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- CHR ASCII_character_code
-
- Displays the character associated with the ASCII_character_code specified. The
- CHR command is the opposite of the ASC command.
-
- Example:
-
- CHR 42
-
- Will place the following message in the message line:
-
- chr 42=*
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.22. CLOSE (Close All Files in Ring) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- CLOSE
-
- CLOSE will close all the files in the current ring. The user will be prompted
- before closing any modified files in the ring. However, if the user chooses not
- to close any of the modified files, no files will be closed.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.23. CONFIGDLG (Open Settings Dialog Box) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- CONFIGDLG
-
- Brings up the Settings dialog box.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.24. COPY2CLIP (Copy Marked Text to PM Clipboard) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- COPY2CLIP
-
- Copies marked text to the PM clipboard for transfer between EPM files or with
- other PM applications.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.25. CUT (Cut Mark and Place in Clipboard) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- CUT
-
- Calls COPY2CLIP to copy marked text to the PM clipboard, then deletes the
- marked text.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.26. DELETEAUTOSAVEFILE (Delete Autosave File) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- DELETEAUTOSAVEFILE
-
- Deletes any existing file which has been created by the AUTOSAVE command.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.27. DELETEBM (Delete Bookmark) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- DELETEBM bookmark_name
-
- Deletes the bookmark of the name bookmark_name.
-
- Example:
-
- DELETEBM the buck stops here
-
- Deletes bookmark with name the buck stops here.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.28. DELETEMENU (Delete a Menu Item) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- DELETEMENU menuname submenuid menuitemid itemonly
-
- Use DELETEMENU to delete an action bar or pulldown menu item. menuname is the
- name of the menu. submenuid is the pulldown submenu that is to be deleted.
- (To delete all submenus set this parameter to 0.) menuitemid is the item to
- start deleting off a particular submenu (To delete all menu items under a
- submenu, set this parameter to 0.) itemonly is true if it is desired to delete
- only the items under a sub-menu but not the sub-menu itself.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.29. DIR (List Directory) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- DIR [path]
-
- Opens a new file in the edit ring with a directory of the specified path, or if
- no path was specified, of the current path. You can use the equal sign = here
- as a shorthand for either the current file's directory or filename, as in the
- Edit command. See the Edit entry in this section for details. E.g., Dir =*.c
-
- Although the text in this window can be maniplulated in the same way as a
- regular file, it must be renamed before it can be saved. Common actions
- include: SORTing the directory and using the Alt-1 key combination to load the
- file listed on the cursor line for editing.
-
- Example:
-
- DIR C:\ANIMALS\RABBIT
-
- Lists the directory C:\ANIMALS\RABBIT.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.30. DISPLAY (Change Message Display Actions) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- DISPLAY number
-
- Use DISPLAY in a Rexx macro to control message display and screen updating. A
- negative number turns the display control off, and a positive number turns it
- back on. You can turn on or off multiple flags in one DISPLAY call by adding
- them together, provided they are all positive or negative. -1 turns off screen
- update; 1 turns it back on. -2 turns off the display of messages; 2 turns it
- back on. -4 forces messages to be displayed in the message box; 4 reverts to
- displaying them on the message line; -8 prevents messages from being saved in
- the message box list; 8 lets them be saved.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.31. DOLINES (Execute Marked Lines) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- DOLINES
-
- Executes the marked lines. Works only if the text contained in the marked lines
- are EPM or OS/2 commands.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.32. DPATH (Query DPATH Setting) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- DPATH
-
- Opens a temporary file and displays the DPATH setting.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.33. DRAW (Draw Lines) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- DRAW [1|2|3|4|5|6|B|/character]
-
- Allows text drawing with cursor keys. If no option is specified, all options
- and their visual representation are shown as a message. The options are:
-
- 1 single line
- 2 double line
- 3 dotted-line (VM-style) drawings
- 4 heavy solid line
- 5 single/double line mixed vert/horiz
- 6 double/single line mixed vert/horiz
- B Blanks, for erasing other lines
- / Slash, followed by any character with which
- you want to draw lines
-
- Note: Styles 5 and 6 use characters that are used as national support
- characters, and may not look right in character sets other than the US
- Code Page.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.34. ECHO (Command Execution Trace Toggle) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- ECHO [ON|OFF]
-
- Turns command execution trace on or off. Useful for seeing what a macro is
- doing during development. You can turn echo on without recompiling the macro to
- see what commands are executed.
-
- Note: Attempting to access a menu pulldown while echo is on will not work, so
- you will have to access the command line via Escape [if enabled] or
- Ctrl+I in order to turn Echo Off.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.35. EDIT, ED, E (Load File) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- EDIT | ED | E [ [ [options] filespec ] [quoted-command] ]
-
- Loads specified files into the active ring. If file already exists in the
- active ring, then it is activated.
-
- The following options are valid when typing the EDIT command on the command
- line dialog and when invoking the editor from the OS/2 prompt:
-
- OPTION EFFECT
- /d forces file to be loaded from disk, even if the file already exists
- in the edit ring.
- /l use the DOS convention that a new line is signified by a carriage
- return followed by a line feed. Carriage returns or line feeds
- standing by themself are kept as text.
- /n restricts file searching to the files already loaded. A match is
- considered if filename matches the last length(filename) characters
- of a file already in a ring. In practice this means you can specify
- only the filename and extension, without the drive and path, and EPM
- will find it.
- /t prevents expansion of tabs when the file is loaded. By default, tabs
- are expanded according to the template defined in the .tabs setting.
- (See Setting Tabs).
- /u use the Unix convention that a line feed alone is sufficient to start
- a new line when loading a file. Carriage returns are discarded.
- = is shorthand for same path as last specified at the OS/2 prompt, or
- same as current file's at the editor command line dialog.
-
- The last option can save many keystrokes if you're editing several files in
- another directory. From the file specification window:
-
- \pas\lang\foo.pas =foo.bak
- will load the two files foo.pas and foo.bak, both from the directory \pas\lang.
- If filespec is to include multiple filenames, the filenames must be separated
- by spaces.
-
- From the editor command line dialog, the equals sign substitutes the current
- file's path, filename, and/or extension, depending on where it appears. For
- example:
-
- Your current directory is C:\EDIT
- The current file is C:\MYDOC\PROG\FOO.DOC
-
- Edit =bar.zot
- C:\MYDOC\PROG\BAR.ZOT
-
- Edit C:\EDIT\=
- C:\EDIT\FOO.DOC
-
- Edit =bar.=
- C:\MYDOC\PROG\BAR.DOC
-
- Edit =.new
- C:\MYDOC\PROG\FOO.NEW
-
- In addition to files to be edited, the Edit command accepts commands to be
- executed. To distinguish commands from filenames, the commands must be placed
- between matched single quotes. If the command to be executed contains single
- quotes, add an extra one for each. File names containing spaces must be
- eclosed in double quotes.
-
- Edit new.c 'get skeleton.c' 'bot'
- E EPM.doc 'L /"help/c' EPM.scr '/:q.help'
- E text 'c /don''t/do not/*'
- E "d:\a long file name"
-
- Return codes are placed in the RC universal variable. RC=0 means no error.
-
- See also: Host Editing
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.36. EPATH, EP (Search EPMPATH for Files) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- EPATH | EP filename [pathname]
-
- If the file specified is not in the current directory, this command will search
- for it along the EPMPATH or pathname before calling EDIT. Useful when editing
- .E files, this command is only included if the USE_APPEND configuration
- constant is set to 1 (default=0), or if both WANT_SEARCH_PATH (default=0) and
- WANT_GET_ENV (default=1) are set to 1.
-
- Example:
-
- EP CHEESESHP.INV
-
- Loads file CHEESESHP.INV if it is located along the EPMPATH.
-
- If filename has an extension of .CMD then the default pathname will be PATH
- rather than EPMPATH.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.37. ESCAPEKEY (Toggle Escape Key Action) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- ESCAPEKEY [ON | OFF]
-
- Use ESCAPEKEY to switch the escape key mode on or off; anything else tells you
- the current value. When escape key mode is on, the escape key can be used to
- bring up the command line dialog (just like Ctrl+I). The default is escape key
- mode off.
-
- This command is only defined when TOGGLE_ESCAPE = 1 is included in the
- configuration file MYCNF.E.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.38. ETPM, ET (Compile E Macros) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- ETPM | ET [option] [source[.E] [output[.EX] ] ]
-
- Compiles E language macros defined in source.e, and places the output into
- output.ex. The new macros can be activated by loading output.ex into the editor
- using the '/e' option when you call the editor from OS/2. For more information,
- refer to section Compiling Macros.
-
- If no output file is specified, ETPM assumes it to have the same filename as
- the source file, but with an .EX extension. If no parameters are given, EPM.E
- (or the file specified by MAINFILE) is compiled into EPM.EX.
-
- The ETPM compiler will report any errors in your programming. The exact meaning
- of ETPM compilation errors can be looked up in The EPM Editor Technical
- Reference Manual.
-
- The options for the ETPM command are:
-
- /E or /e redirects compiler error messages. Example usage:
-
- ETPM /e errs.txt epm.e epm.ex
- This will cause all compilation error messages to be collected in the file
- errs.txt.
-
- /V or /v lists the name of each file as it is being compiled.
-
- ETPM searches the following directories (in the following order) for any .E
- files that it needs:
-
- 1. the current directory,
- 2. the directories specified in the EPMPATH environment variable (if it
- exists),
- 3. the directories in the DPATH environment variable,
- 4. the same directory as the file ETPM.EXE.
-
- See Using the RELINK, LINK, UNLINK and ETPM commands for more information.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.39. EXPAND (Syntax Expansion Toggle) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- EXPAND [ON|OFF]
-
- Sets syntax expansion ON or OFF. If no parameters are given, current value is
- displayed. Syntax expansion occurs when SPACE BAR or ENTER is pressed while a
- file with a supported language specific extension is active (i.e. .E or .C or
- .PAS or .CMD). Or you can start out with automatic expansion off by setting the
- variable MY_EXPAND_ON to 0 in MYCNF.E; you can then force expansion to occur by
- pressing Ctrl-X. See Including New Features into the Default Configuration for
- more information about changing MYCNF.E.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.40. FILE, F (Quit and Save File) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- FILE | F [/t] [filespec]
-
- Saves the current file and then quits it, the same as SAVE plus QUIT. If no
- filespec is given, the current name is used. You can use the equal sign = here
- as a shorthand for either the current file's directory or filename, as in the
- Edit command. See the Edit entry in this section for details. If the `/t'
- option is given, tab compression is performed: a file is compressed by
- substituting tabs for spaces where possible, i.e. when two or more spaces are
- found close to a tab stop.
-
- Note: See the description of the Save command for a complete list of options.
-
- Example:
-
- FILE GREEN.REM
-
- Save the file as GREEN.REM, then quits the file.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.41. FILL (Fill Mark) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- FILL [character]
-
- Will fill the marked block with the character specified. If no character is
- specified, an entry box will be put up asking for one.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.42. FINDFILE (Search for File) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- FINDFILE [filespec]
-
- Same as LIST.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.43. GET (Insert File) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- GET filespec
-
- Gets a file and inserts its text on the next line after the cursor position.
- You can use the equals sign = here as a shorthand for either the current file's
- directory or filename, as in the Edit command. See the EDIT command for
- details.
-
- Example:
-
- GET SNORKELS.DAT
-
- Loads file SNORKELS.DAT into the current file at the cursor position.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.44. GO, GOMARK (Go to Bookmark) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- GO | GOMARK bookmark_name
-
- Moves the cursor to the position given by the bookmark.
-
- Example:
-
- GO fargle beans
-
- Places the cursor at the location given by the bookmark fargle beans.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.45. HELP (Load Help File) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- HELP
-
- Loads the EPMHELP.QHL file into a help browser window to display help
- information.
-
- Example:
-
- HELP
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.46. INSERT_ATTR_VAL_PAIR (Insert Character Attributes) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- INSERT_ATTR_VAL_PAIR class attr_val [fstline lstline fstcol lstcol [fid]]
-
- Use INSERT_ATTR_VAL_PAIR in a Rexx macro to insert push and pop attributes as a
- pair into a file. class is the attribute class; attr_val is the attribute
- value; fstline lstline fstcol lstcol refer to the beginning and ending
- characters where the attributes are to be inserted (if omitted, then a mark
- must exist, and the attributes are inserted at the beginning and end of the
- mark; for a block mark, at the left and right sides of the mark on each line),
- and fid is the identifier of the file into which the attributes should be
- inserted (if omitted, it defaults to the current file).
-
- /* Rexx macro to highlight the subject line */
- /* Assumes .levelofattributesupport has '1' turned on */
- /* to enable color display. */
- BLACK = 0; BLUE = 1; GREEN = 2; CYAN = 3; RED = 4; MAGENTA = 5; BROWN = 6;
- LIGHT_GREY = 7; DARK_GREY = 8; LIGHT_BLUE = 9; LIGHT_GREEN = 10;
- LIGHT_CYAN = 11; LIGHT_RED = 12; LIGHT_MAGENTA = 13; YELLOW = 14;
- WHITE = 15; BLACKB = 0; BLUEB = 16; GREENB = 32; CYANB = 48; REDB = 64;
- MAGENTAB = 80; BROWNB = 96; GREYB =112; LIGHT_GREYB =112;
- DARK_GREYB =128; LIGHT_BLUEB =144; LIGHT_GREENB =160; LIGHT_CYANB = 176;
- LIGHT_REDB =192; LIGHT_MAGENTAB =208; YELLOWB =224; WHITEB =240;
-
- 'l /Subject:/c'
- if rc = 0 then do /* Found it! */
- 'extract /line/col'
- 'Insert_attr_val_pair 1' (Light_Magenta + Light_CyanB) ,
- line.1 line.1 col.1 (col.1 + 7)
- end
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.47. INSERT_ATTRIBUTE (Insert Character Attribute) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- INSERT_ATTRIBUTE class attr_val push_flag offset [col [line [fid]]]
-
- Use INSERT_ATTRIBUTE in a Rexx macro to insert a character attribute into a
- file. class is the attribute class; attr_val is the attribute value; push_flag
- is 1 for push, 0 for pop, or the value appropriate for the attribute class
- specified. offset is the offset from the character at which the attribute
- should be inserted; line and col are the position at which the attribute should
- be inserted, and default to the cursor position; and fid is the identifier of
- the file into which the attributes should be inserted (if omitted, it defaults
- to the current file).
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.48. KEY (Repeat Keystroke) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- KEY #### character
-
- Repeats character horizontally #### times. This can be quite powerful; for
- example you can repeat an entire set of recorded keystrokes (Ctrl-T) 20 times.
- Example: KEY 80 =. This will write a line of 80 equal signs into your
- document. character can be a normal ASCII character or a string representing an
- extended ASCII character Example: KEY 10 c-F8.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.49. L (Locate Text) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- [L] /pattern[/ [- | + | M | A | C | E | R | F | G] ]
-
- Locates text in the active file which matches pattern. The pattern delimiters
- (here shown as /) can be any non-blank character which is not present in
- pattern. The options following the second delimiter control the direction,
- scope and upper/lower case sensitivity of the search. The command name (L) may
- be omitted for convenience, in which case the delimiter must be /. See details
- in Steps to Search for a String.
-
- After a locate command, pressing Ctrl-F will repeat the search with the same
- options.
-
- Example:
-
- L /to be or not to be
-
- Searches for the first occurrence of the string to be or not to be.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.50. LINK (Link File into EPM) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- LINK [filespec]
-
- Will link the filespec.EX file into the currently executing version of EPM. See
- Using the RELINK, LINK, UNLINK and ETPM commands for more information.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.51. LIST, FILEFIND, FINDFILE filespec ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- LIST | FILEFIND | FINDFILE [filespec]
-
- Loads a list of filenames that match filespec This may take a significant
- amount of time (a minute or more) if you name a filespec that qualifies an
- entire hard disk, such as list \*.*. If the filespec is not given *.* is
- assumed. Once you have the list, by placing the cursor on the name of a file,
- you can press Alt-1 to edit that file.
-
- Example:
-
- LIST C:\CLAY\GUMBY\POKEY.*
-
- This command will list all of the files in the C:\CLAY\GUMBY\ directory which
- match the specifier POKEY.*.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.52. LISTMARK (List Bookmarks) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- LISTMARK
-
- Lists all existing bookmarks.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.53. LONGNAMES (Long Names Toggle) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- LONGNAMES [ON | OFF]
-
- Use LONGNAMES to switch the long names setting on or off; anything else tells
- you the current value. When long names is on, a file containing a .LONGNAMES
- extended attribute will have the extended attribute value shown on the title
- bar when being edited, rather than the actual file name. This is useful if a
- file with a long name is copied from an HPFS drive to a FAT drive and has the
- original name saved in .LONGNAME; you will be able to see the long name instead
- of the truncated name. The default is long names mode off. This command is
- only defined when the WANT_LONGNAMES option is enabled in the configuration
- file MYCNF.E.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.54. LOCK (Lock File) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- LOCK [filespec]
-
- Will lock the current file or the file specified from other users in a LAN
- networking situation. This command is only defined when the WANT_LAN_SUPPORT
- option is enabled in the configuration file MYCNF.E.
-
- Example:
-
- LOCK PARTICLE.MAN
-
- Locks the file PARTICLE.MAN.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.55. LOOPKEY (Repeat Keystroke Vertically) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- LOOPKEY [####|ALL] char
-
- Allows the repeat of char in a vertical column. The character will be entered
- #### times, proceeding vertically downward in the current column. (Compare this
- to the KEY command, which repeats the key horizontally in the same row.) The
- argument ALL can be given instead of a number, in which case the repetition
- will continue to the end of the file. char can be a normal ASCII character or a
- string representing an extended ASCII character
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.56. LOWERCASE (Convert to Lowercase) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- LOWERCASE
-
- Converts all uppercase alphabetic characters in the marked area to lowercase.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.57. MARGINS, MA (View/Change Margins) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- MARGINS | MA [ left [ right [ new_pgph ] ] ]
-
- Sets the margins with the parameters: column number on the left, column number
- on the right, and number of spaces to indent the start of a new paragraph. The
- new-paragraph indentation occurs when you press Alt-P, for example. Words typed
- past the right margin are wrapped to the next line. left and new_pgph must be
- less than right.
-
- If no parameters are given, the current value is presented on the command line
- to allow easy modification. If right is omitted, it defaults to the current
- value; if new_pgph is omitted, it defaults to left.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.58. MARKWORD (Mark Word) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- MARKWORD
-
- Marks the word under the cursor. This command is equivalent to the standard key
- defintion of Alt+W.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.59. MATCHTAB (Type of Tab Toggle) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- MATCHTAB [ON | OFF]
-
- If set on, the Tab and Shift-Tab keys use the previous line's columns for the
- current line's tab stops. The previous line's columns are defined by the first
- letter of each space-delimited word. If no parameter is given, the current
- value is displayed.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.60. MATH (Resolve Simple Expression) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- MATH expression
-
- Computes expression using floating point arithmetic and displays the result on
- the message line. Output is decimal. Input numbers may be hex (Ex. xff), octal
- (Ex. o77), and decimal. Valid operators are +, -, /, *, % (integer division)
- and // (remainder).
-
- Example:
-
- MATH 121345342-121345340+1-3
-
- When this is executed the result will be placed in the message line. In this
- case:
-
- math 121345342-121345340+1-3= 0
-
- See Calculating Mathematical Expressions for further details.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.61. MATHO (Resolve Simple Expression) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- MATHO expression
-
- Same as MATH command but output is octal.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.62. MATHX (Resolve Simple Expression) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- MATHX expression
-
- Same as MATH command but output is hexadecimal.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.63. MESSAGEBOX (Bring up Message Box) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- MESSAGEBOX
-
- Brings up the Editor Messages box for review.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.64. MULT (Multiply Numbers in Mark) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- MULT
-
- Multiplies the numbers in the marked area, and inserts the product in a new row
- underneath the marked area.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.65. NAME, N (Name Current File) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- NAME | N [filespec]
-
- Renames the file in the editor buffer, but not on disk. The new name will be
- used the next time you save the file. A useful way to avoid overwriting the
- original.
-
- Example:
-
- NAME ACHTUNG.U2
-
- This command will name the current file ACHTUNG.U2.
-
- If no name is given, the command line dialog will be presented prefilled with
- Name current_file_name.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.66. NEWWINDOW (Create New Edit Window) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- NEWWINDOW
-
- Use NEWWINDOW to save the current file if it has been changed, open a new
- window containing the file, then quit the file in the current window.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.67. OPEN, O (Open New Edit Ring) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- OPEN | O { [ [options] filespec] [quoted-command] }
-
- Loads specified files into a new window (and therefore a new ring). This OPEN
- command is similar to the EDIT command, however, OPEN will open the file in a
- new window, whereas EDIT will add the file to the edit ring of the current
- window. Note that OPEN will open the file regardless of other open copies of
- the file in other rings. The following options are valid when typing the OPEN
- command on the command line dialog (in addition to those valid for the EDIT
- command):
-
- OPTION EFFECT
-
- /e loads the compiled macros in the file specified after the /e switch.
- See section Compiling Macros for examples. Note: If you do not use this
- option, the default compiled macros are used, i.e. the file EPM.EX is
- interpreted by the editor.
-
- = is shorthand for same path as last specified at the OS/2 prompt, or
- same as current file's at the editor command line dialog.
-
- The last option can save many keystrokes if you're editing several files in
- another directory.
-
- See the description of the Edit command for examples of using the = as part of
- the file specifier, and for examples of passing commands to be executed in the
- new edit window.
-
- Return codes are placed in the RC universal variable. RC==0 means no error.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.68. OPENPATH,OP (Open File from Path) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- OPENPATH | OP [filename]
-
- If the file specified is not in the current directory, this command will search
- for it along the EPMPATH before calling OPEN. This command is only defined when
- the EPATH command is defined; see the description of EPATH for the
- requirements. If no filename is given the command will open the new edit ring
- with an untitled file.
-
- Example:
-
- OP HOLLOW.MEN
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.69. OS2 (Execute OS/2 Command) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- OS2 command
-
- Run the OS/2 command processor (as specified by the COMSPEC environment
- variable) to execute a command. A new windowed OS/2 command session is started
- to execute the command. Compare this with the QUIETSHELL command.
-
- Example:
-
- OS2 erase c:\*.*
-
- This will execute the command erase c:\*.* in a new windowed OS/2 command
- session.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.70. PASTE (Paste Text Into Clipboard) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- PASTE [C | B]
-
- Moves text from the PM clipboard into EPM file at the current cursor location.
- The text in the buffer can come from either an EPM file or any other PM
- application. If no argument is given, the text is inserted as new lines in the
- file. If the argument is 'C', the text is inserted as a character stream, and
- if the argument is 'B', the text is inserted as a block.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.71. PATH (Display Path Variable) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- PATH
-
- Opens a temporary file and displays the current PATH setting.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.72. POPMARK (Pop Mark from Stack) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- POPMARK
-
- Pops the mark on the top of the Mark Stack and creates it. If no mark has been
- pushed onto the Mark Stack, this command will have no effect.
-
- This command is only defined when the WANT_STACK_CMDS option is enabled in the
- configuration file MYCNF.E.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.73. POPPOS (Pop Cursor Position from Stack) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- POPPOS
-
- Pops the cursor location from the top of the Position Stack and moves the
- cursor to this location. If the Position Stack is empty an error will occur.
-
- This command is only defined when the WANT_STACK_CMDS option is enabled in the
- configuration file MYCNF.E.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.74. PRINT (Print File) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- PRINT [printer_name]
-
- Sends the marked block, or the entire file if there is no mark, to your
- printer. Printer_name must be PRN, LPT1:, LPT2:, ... LPT9:, COM1: ... COM:4, or
- a LAN device (e.g., \\server\printq). If no printer is specified then the block
- or file will be output to the default printer.
-
- Note: Entering the print command will print in draft mode. If you wish to
- print in WYSIWYG mode you must choose Print File... selection from the
- File menu.
-
- See Printing a File for more details.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.75. PROCESSBREAK (Halt Command in Progress) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- PROCESSBREAK
-
- This command is executed when Ctrl+Break is pressed or Command / Halt Command
- is selected from the action bar. The default action is to do a
-
- sayerror 'Macro halted by user'
- but E macro programmers can add cleanup code if needed for their routines.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.76. PROFILE (Toggle Profile Setting) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- PROFILE [ON | OFF]
-
- Use PROFILE to switch the profile setting on or off; anything else tells you
- the current value. When PROFILE is on, a Rexx profile (PROFILE.ERX) is
- searched for along the EPMPATH and PATH. If found, it is executed, and passed
- the same arguments that EPM was given. This happens after EPM has processed
- the arguments. The default is profile mode off.
-
- This command is only defined when WANT_PROFILE = 'SWITCH' is included in the
- configuration file MYCNF.E.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.77. PROCESSFONTREQUEST (Set a Font) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- PROCESSFONTREQUEST fontname.fontsize.fontsel.setfont.markedonly[.fg.bg]
-
- The PROCESSFONTREQUEST command is used internally by the Style and Settings
- dialogs, but it can also be issued by the user from the EPM command line or
- from a macro. The parameters are:
-
- fontname the name of the font to be set.
-
- fontsize the size of the font to be set; can be any point size (for ATM
- fonts), or can be a width and height (in pixels) that match an
- existing bitmap font. Note that ATM fonts can be displayed in any
- size, even though only a limited number of sizes are shown in the
- font dialogs. The size can be represented as in integer point size,
- or DDnnn for nnn deci-points, or HHhhWWww for a bitmapped font hh
- pixels high and ww pixels wide.
-
- fontsel the attributes of the font to be set; can be any combination of:
-
- 1 Italic
- 2 Underscore
- 8 Outline
- 16 Strikeout
- 32 Bold
-
- setfont A flag (0 or 1) specifying whether the font should be made the
- default font for all future edit windows. Only processed if
- markedonly is 0.
-
- markedonly A flag (0 or 1) specifying whether the font change should apply to
- the marked area only, or should be made the base font for the file.
-
- fg Optional foreground color (0 - 15; see COLORS.E) used if markedonly
- is 1.
-
- bg Optional background color (0 - 15; see COLORS.E) used if markedonly
- is 1.
-
- Examples:
-
- Set base font to 16-point Times New Roman:
- PROCESSFONTREQUEST Times New Roman.16.0.0.0
- Display the marked text in 17 1/2-point Helvetica Bold Italic:
- PROCESSFONTREQUEST Helvetica.DD175.33.0.1
- Change base font to 20x9 System Monospaced, and make it permanent:
- PROCESSFONTREQUEST System Monospaced.HH20WW9.0.1.0
- Display the marked text in a 24-point outline Tms Rmn font, with a
- magenta foreground and a light cyan background:
- PROCESSFONTREQUEST Tms Rmn.24.8.0.1.5.11
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.78. PROOF (Spell Check Document) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- PROOF
-
- The proof command begins the spell check facility. When the PROOF command is
- issued, EPM begins spell checking at the cursor position and continues until a
- suspect word is found, or until the end of the document is reached. If a
- suspect word is found, a spell check dialog box will appear. The upper portion
- of the dialog box contains possible corrections. The bottom of the dialog box
- asks you to choose: Replace, Cancel, Next, Temp. Add, Add, Edit or Help. If the
- word appears spelled correctly in the list of possible corrections, use the
- mouse to click on the correct spelling (thereby highlighting your choice) and
- then click on the Replace entry at the bottom of the dialog box. EPM will make
- the substitution automatically. (You can double-click on any word word in the
- list to select Replace for that word.) Choose the Cancel option to stop spell
- checking. Choose the Next option to ignore the word and continue with spell
- checking. Choose Temp. Add to mark the word as correctly spelled for the
- current PROOF session, but not update your addenda file. Choose Add to add the
- word to your addenda file for future spell checks. Choose Edit to be given a
- chance to edit the word; the result will be substituted for the word in the
- file and then rechecked. Choose Help to display a help panel describing what
- each button does.
-
- Note: Spell checking requires LEXAM.DLL, which is included with some other IBM
- products (e.g., OS/2 TCP/IP). It is not available directly.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.79. PROOFWORD (Spell Check Current Word) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- PROOFWORD
-
- Proofs the word that the cursor is on. It brings up the spell checking dialog
- box if the word is spelled incorectly. See the PROOF command for more
- information on the spell checking dialog box.
-
- Note: Spell checking requires LEXAM.DLL, which is included with some other IBM
- products (e.g., OS/2 TCP/IP). It is not available directly.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.80. PUSHMARK (Push Current Mark onto Stack) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- PUSHMARK
-
- Pushes the location of the current mark into a stack to allow it to be recalled
- later using a POPMARK command.
-
- Note: Only the position of the mark relative to the file is saved, so if lines
- are added to the file before the saved position, and then the mark is
- popped, different text will be marked than was originally.
-
- This command is only defined when the WANT_STACK_CMDS option is enabled in the
- configuration file MYCNF.E.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.81. PUSHPOS (Push Current Position onto Stack) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- PUSHPOS
-
- Pushes the location of the current cursor position into a stack to allow it to
- be recalled later using a POPPOS command.
-
- This command is only defined when the WANT_STACK_CMDS option is enabled in the
- configuration file MYCNF.E.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.82. PUT (Append Text to a File) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- PUT [filespec]
-
- Writes the marked text area to the named file. If the named file already exists
- it's appended rather than overwritten.
-
- For convenience, filespec can be omitted if you wish to repeat a PUT to the
- same file. PUT commands without a filespec will reuse the last-specified name.
-
- If there is no mark, the entire current file is PUT. You can use the equals
- sign = here as a shorthand for either the directory or filename, as in the Edit
- command.
-
- Example:
-
- PUT IT.NOW
-
- Will append the marked text to the end of the file IT.NOW.
-
- See the Edit entry in this section for details.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.83. QDATE, QD (Query System Date) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- QDATE | QD
-
- Displays the current system date in the form:
-
- Today is Sunday July 21, 1992.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.84. QL, QLINK, QLINKED (Query Link Status) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- QL | QLINK | QLINKED [filespec]
-
- Checks if the E module specified in filespec is linked. For example, to see if
- LAMPDQ has been linked you could type from the command line dialog:
-
- QLINKED lampdq
- Depending on your configuration EPM will return:
-
- o 'Can't find LAMPDQ on disk' - LAMPDQ.EX does not exist in the EPMPATH (it may
- be in the uncompiled LAMPDQ.E form);
- o 'LAMPDQ is not linked' - LAMPDQ has not been included in EPM;
- o 'LAMPDQ is linked as module #somenum' - LAMPDQ has been included in EPM.
- See Using the RELINK, LINK, UNLINK and ETPM commands for more information.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.85. QS, QUIETSHELL (Quiet OS/2 Shell) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- QS | QUIETSHELL command
-
- Executes the OS/2 command specified by command without displaying any results
- from the command. This is useful when you want to execute an OS/2 command and
- avoid a macro front-end.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.86. QTIME, QT (Query Time) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- QTIME | QT
-
- Displays the current system time in the form:
-
- The time is 3:12:31 am.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.87. QUIT, Q (Quit Current File) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- QUIT | Q
-
- Quits current file and exits the ring if no more files are left. If the visible
- ring is empty, then the editor exits with return code 0.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.88. RC (Display Return Code) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- RC command
-
- Displays return code of command. A good way to determine the exact result of a
- command. A number will be shown which can be looked up in section Return Codes.
- This command should be used in the following way:
-
- rc tabs 35 10 20
- This command will result in the error number 272 ("Error in tab settings")
- being displayed below the command line dialog.
-
- RC can also be used to verify that OS/2 commands completed successfully without
- having to open a command prompt or redirect output:
-
- RC erase temp.fil
- This will display a RC of 0 if the command completed successfully.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.89. REFLOW_ALL (Reflow Entire File) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- REFLOW_ALL
-
- Reflows all of the current file to the margins.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.90. REGISTER_MOUSE (Register Mouse Event) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- REGISTER_MOUSE which button action shifts command
-
- Use REGISTER_MOUSE in a Rexx macro to associate a command with a mouse event.
- which is 1 for the global mouse table or 0 for the local; button is the mouse
- button (1, 2 or 3), action is one of:
-
- Action meaning
-
- CLICK Pressing and releasing the mouse button produces a click.
-
- SECONDCLK follows click when the mouse is double-clicked.
-
- BEGINDRAG this is called when the mouse button is depressed and the mouse is
- moved.
-
- ENDDRAG this is called when the mouse button is released after dragging it.
-
- CANCELDRAG. this is called when the drag is cancelled (by pressing Esc before
- releaseing the mouse button).
- shifts is 0 for no shift, or the sum of any combination of 1 for the shift key,
- 2 for the Ctrl key, and 4 for the Alt key. command is the command to be
- executed when this mouse event occurs, or blank if the event should be ignored.
-
- Note: The standard mouse definitions issue a register_mouse for ENDDRAG and
- CANCELDRAG as part of the BEGINDRAG processing.
-
- /* Register an action for Ctrl+Alt+Double-click MB1 */
- 'register_mouse 1 1 SECONDCLK 6 rx do_line'
-
- /* Do_Line.erx */
- 'MH_gotoposition' /* Move cursor to mouse position */
- 'extract /line/getline'
- if line.1 > 0 then
- getline.1 /* Execute the line as a command */
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.91. RELINK (Relink Macros) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- RELINK [filespec]
-
- Compiles and links a macro into a currently running version of EPM. See Using
- the RELINK, LINK, UNLINK and ETPM commands for more information.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.92. RENAME (Rename File) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- RENAME
-
- Allows you to rename the current file. This command presents the Rename dialog.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.93. SAVE, S (Save Current File) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- SAVE | S [/q] [/s | /ns] [/t | /nt] [/ne] [/u | /l] [filespec]
-
- Saves the file to disk, using the current name if none is specified. You can
- use the equals sign = here as a shorthand for either the directory or filename,
- as you can in the Edit command. See the Edit entry in this section for details.
- The '/q' option saves quietly; the "Saved to" message is not given. If the '/s'
- option is given, trailing spaces are stripped from each line as it is written
- out. The '/ns' option says to not strip spaces; this is the default. If the
- '/t' option is given, tab compression is performed: a file is compressed by
- substituting tabs for spaces where possible, i.e. when two or more spaces are
- found close to a tab stop. The '/nt' option says No Tabs; it can be used to
- override default_save_options = '/t' The '/ne' option prevents the EOF from
- being written at the end of the file. The '/u' option says to save the file in
- Unix format - i.e., each line should be terminated with just a line feed, and
- no EOF should be added at the End of File. This is useful when saving files to
- NFS-mounted drives on an AIX or Unix system. The '/l' option is the default;
- this says to save the file in standard OS/2 format - each line should be
- terminated with a carriage return followed by a line feed; an EOF character is
- added at the end if SET EOF 1 is in effect.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.94. SAYERROR (Display Error Code or Message) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- SAYERROR expression
-
- Use SAYERROR to display an error code or message in the message area.
-
- If expression is the number 0 or 1, any pending error messages are discarded
- and not displayed. 0 will refresh the screen; 1 will not.
-
- If expression is any number other than 0 or 1, the interpreter displays the
- string corresponding to that numbered error message. Error messages and their
- corresponding return codes are listed in the EPM Technical Reference.
-
- If expression is not a number, that text will be displayed on the message line.
- This is useful in Rexx macros.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.95. SELECT_ALL (Select Entire File) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- SELECT_ALL
-
- Creates a mark which encompasses the entire file.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.96. SET (Execute an OS/2 SET Command) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- SET
-
- Executes an OS/2 SET command. All the SET parameters will be displayed in a
- temporary file.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.97. SETMARKP (Set Permanent Bookmark) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- SETMARKP
-
- Sets a permanent bookmark at the current cursor position.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.98. SETSCROLLS (Toggle Scroll Bars) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- SETSCROLLS
-
- Toggles the scroll bars (both the horizontal and vertical) on or off.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.99. SHELL (Start OS/2 Shell) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- SHELL
-
- Use SHELL to create an EPM command shell session. If the MYCNF.E contains
- WANT_EPM_SHELL='HIDDEN', then the first time you enter SHELL in an edit window,
- two new entries will be added to the Command menu. Create command shell
- creates a new shell window, and Write to shell... lets you write a string to
- the shell window. If the shell window is waiting at an OS/2 command prompt,
- then you can enter a command to be executed by either:
-
- 1. Select Command.
- 2. Select Write to shell....
- 3. Type the text to be written to the shell.
- 4. Select OK.
- or
-
- 1. Type the text in the shell window following the prompt.
- 2. Press the Enter key.
-
- If the string to be written to the shell is in response to a program prompt,
- then you must perform the first sequence; the second method won't write
- anything to the shell. (The standard Enter key definition recognizes the
- default EPM_SHELL_PROMPT and automatically performs a Write to shell. Note that
- this works as well for repeating previously entered commands.)
-
- The shell can be used for running any non-fullscreen OS/2 program. The output
- from the program is inserted in the shell window as it is generated, even if
- you switch to some other file in the edit ring.
-
- This command is only defined when the WANT_SHELL option is enabled in the
- configuration file MYCNF.E.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.100. SHOWMENU (Activate Menu) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- SHOWMENU menuname
-
- Use SHOWMENU to activate the action bar named menuname. Changes made with the
- BuildSubMenu and BuildMenuItem commands will not be seen until the updated menu
- is displayed with ShowMenu.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.101. SORT, SORTDLL (Sort Text) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- SORT | SORTDLL [R] [C] [I]
-
- If no area is marked, sorts the entire file. If an area is marked, the entire
- lines are sorted with the marked columns treated as the sort key. The options
- are as follows:
-
- R Sorts in reverse (descending) order.
- C Sorts according to collating order, as indicated by your country and code
- page settings.
- I Sorts ignoring case.
-
- If two lines have equal keys they are left in the same relative order. This
- allows you to sort a directory listing, for example, first by extension and
- again by filename; during the second sort, lines with equal filenames will be
- left in extension order.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.102. STAY (Toggle SETSTAY) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- STAY ON|OFF
-
- Allows SETSTAY option to be changed from within EPM. When STAY is specified
- with ON then the cursor will not be moved after a change command has been
- issued. With STAY set to OFF, the cursor will move to the last occurrence of a
- change when the change command is issued.
-
- This command is only defined when SETSTAY = '?' is included in the
- configuration file MYCNF.E.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.103. STDFILE_READ (Read a File From STDIN) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- STDFILE_READ
-
- Reads a file in from STDIN. This is most useful when the STDIN has been
- redirected from a keyboard to another device.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.104. STDFILE_WRITE (Write a File to STDOUT) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- STDFILE_WRITE
-
- Writes a file to STDOUT. This command is most useful to write files when the
- STDOUT device has been redirected.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.105. SUBJECT (Set File Subject) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- SUBJECT
-
- Use SUBJECT to display, set, or change the file subject field.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.106. SWAPMARK (Swap Mark with Mark on Stack) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- SWAPMARK
-
- Swaps the current mark with the top mark in the mark stack. Will fail if no
- mark exists in the current window.
-
- This command is only defined when the WANT_STACK_CMDS option is enabled in the
- configuration file MYCNF.E.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.107. SWAPPOS (Swap Position with Position on Stack) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- SWAPPOS
-
- Swaps the current position of the cursor with the top position in the position
- stack.
-
- This command is only defined when the WANT_STACK_CMDS option is enabled in the
- configuration file MYCNF.E.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.108. TABKEY (Toggle Tab Key Mode) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- TABKEY [ON | OFF]
-
- Use TABKEY to switch the tab key mode on or off; anything else tells you the
- current value. When tab key mode is on, the tab key will enter a tab
- character. When TAB key mode is off, the tab key will move the cursor to the
- next tab stop without typing in a tab character. The default is tab key mode
- off.
-
- You must issue this command from the Command window.
-
- This command is only defined when the TOGGLE_TAB option is enabled in the
- configuration file MYCNF.E.
-
- To save the current tab key mode setting as your permanent default:
-
- 1. Select Options.
- 2. Select Save options.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.109. TABS (Set Tabs) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- TABS n1 [n2...n32]
-
- Sets tab stops used by Tab and Shift-Tab keys. If only one tab stop is
- specified, e.g. TABS 8, the editor interprets this as meaning that the user
- wants 32 tabs set, each 8 spaces apart, beginning with column 1. In this case,
- the result would be the same as issuing the following command: TABS 1 9 17 25
- ... 247 The tab stops must must be listed in ascending order. If no tab values
- are listed then the current tab settings are returned in the command dialog
- window (so they can be modified, if desired). Syntax errors in the tab values
- will be ignored. See Setting Tabs for more information on setting tabs.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.110. TOGGLECONTROL (Toggle Window Visibility) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- TOGGLECONTROL windownum [0|1]
-
- Toggles the window specified by windownum. If the second argument is a 1; then
- EPM will attempt to turn window on. If the second argument is a 0; then EPM
- will attempt to turn the window off. If no second argument is given, then if
- the window is off it will be turned on; and if the window is on, then it will
- be turned off. Useful windownum values are:
-
- 7 = the status line
- 8 = the message line
- 9 = the vertical scroll bar
- 10 = the horizontal scroll bar
- 20 = the ring icons
- 22 = the drag/drop text icon (OS/2 1.3 only)
- 23 = the status and message line position (top or bottom of window)
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.111. TOP (Go to Top of File) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- TOP
-
- Moves to the top of the current file.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.112. TRIM (Trim Window) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- TRIM
-
- Use TRIM to resize the edit window so that no partial characters can be seen at
- the right or bottom edge of the edit window.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.113. TYPE (Set Type of File) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- TYPE
-
- Use TYPE to display, set, or change the file type.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.114. UNIVERSAL (Change Universal Variables) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- UNIVERSAL variable_name [value]
-
- Use REGISTER_MOUSE in a Rexx macro to update some internal universal variables
- without having to recompile the macros. variable_name can be one of
-
- default_search_options Options used by the Locate command and initial values
- for the Search dialog.
-
- default_edit_options Options used by the Edit command
-
- default_save_options Options used by the Save command
- value is the value to be set in the universal variable, and can be blank. The
- value of these variables is inserted before any options passed on the command
- line, so these defaults can be overridden on any specific command.
-
- /* Profile.erx - initializations for a new edit window */
- /* Make the default search be case-insensitive */
- 'universal default_search_options C'
- /* No Tabs - expand them when loading a file */
- 'universal default_edit_options /nt'
- /* Strip trailing blanks when saving a file */
- 'universal default_save_options /s'
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.115. UNLINK (Unlink EPM Macros) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- UNLINK [filespec]
-
- Removes an E module (ie .EX code) from a version of EPM running in memory. This
- is useful to remove unused or temporary code to save space. See Using the
- RELINK, LINK, UNLINK and ETPM commands for more information.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.116. UNLOCK (Unlock File) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- UNLOCK [filename]
-
- Unlocks a file that was locked using the LOCK command or EDIT /K.
-
- This command is only defined if WANT_LAN_SUPPORT was requested.
-
- Example:
-
- UNLOCK E:\FISH\WANDA\TANK.KEN
-
- Unlocks the file TANK.KEN from the directory E:\FISH\WANDA.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.117. UPPERCASE (Convert Text to Uppercase) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- UPPERCASE
-
- Converts all lowercase alphabetic characters in the marked area to uppercase
- letters.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.118. VER (Display Version) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- VER
-
- Displays the version of EPM. For example:
-
- EPM Version 5.51
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.119. VOL (Query Volume Label) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- VOL [drive_letter]
-
- Displays the current drive's volume label information in a temporary file. This
- command is like the OS/2 VOL command.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2.120. XCOM (Execute Interal Command) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Syntax:
-
- XCOM built-in command
-
- Executes internal (built-in) command, ignoring user-defined (DEFC) commands.
- Prefix your command line dialog with this when you want to be sure to execute
- the original EPM version of a command, not the user's redefinition.
-
- Note: The primary intent of XCOM is for executing internal editor commands, to
- avoid a user's redefinitions.
-
- A typical case is xcom e filespec which executes the unembellished EPM edit
- command. (One reason for doing this is speed; if you're loading a file only for
- temporary look-up purposes you don't need the extra checking for a host file
- name, etc.)
-
- But this can be confusing because the executed command might end up being an
- external OS2 program. If EPM cannot find the command internally it will look to
- OS2, in which case the effect is the same as typing OS2 command. This is not
- the normal usage, however. If you know in advance that you want a OS2 command
- as opposed to a DEFC, you can use the QUIETSHELL prefix.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13. Changing Common Default Values Via the Settings Dialog ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Select Options / Preferences / Settings to activate the Settings dialog, which
- has pages to let you configure certain features without requiring recompilation
- of the macros. The pages of the Settings dialog are briefly described below;
- you can select the Help button while viewing any page in the dialog to get more
- detailed information.
-
- Tabs Set the default TABS setting.
-
- Margins Set the default left, right, and paragraph MARGINS settings.
-
- Colors Set the default colors for normal text, marked (selected) text, the
- status line, and the message line.
-
- Paths Set the temporary path, autosave path, and (if spell-checking
- support is enabled) the dictionary and addenda file locations.
-
- Autosave Set the default AUTOSAVE count.
-
- Fonts Set the default font in which text should be displayed.
-
- Keys Configure the actions performed for various combinations of the
- Enter keys.
-
- Note: This page will only be present if the .ex files were
- compiled with ENHANCED_ENTER_KEYS set to 1 in the MYCNF.E.
-
-
- Change all the appropriate values to your desired settings, then select the
- Save button. Your preferences will be saved in the EPM.INI file. (Only modified
- pages are actually saved.) EPM.INI is checked for EPM settings when opening a
- new edit window. This means that the configuration values will override any
- values set in MYCNF.E and compiled into the .ex files.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14. Host Editing ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Information on the use of the host editing features of EPM.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.1. Introduction ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- EPM allows editing of IBM mainframe files from your PC. The host can have
- either a VM or MVS operating system. Your PC must use a terminal emulator
- package which supports file transfer between the two systems. EPM supports the
- OS2 Communications Manager using the ALMCOPY command for uploading and
- downloading.
-
- To specify a host file name, the dummy drive letter H: is used. Below is an
- example of editing a CMS file from within EPM.
-
- edit h:profile exec
-
- When EPM sees the H: it expects a CMS file specification to follow (i.e.
- filename filetype [filemode]). Note the use of spaces, not periods. The
- default filemode is A.
-
- Host filenames can be given to any of the following EPM commands.
-
- PUT
- GET
- S, SAVE
- APPEND
- E, EDIT
- F, FILE
- O, OPEN
-
- Notice that the LIST command cannot take a host file specification.
-
- If your machine crashes while saving a host file there will be a temporary file
- created on your PC. If you use the standard host support, these temporary files
- have names like eeeeeeee.nnn, where nnn is a system supplied number. The files
- will be in the TEMP_PATH directory. If you use the E3EMUL host support, these
- temporary files have names like filename.ext, where ext is the first three
- characters of the host filetype. The files will be in the SAVEPATH directory.
- (If you do not have a MY_SAVEPATH in your MYCNF.E, this will default to the
- AUTOSAVE_PATH.) In addition, E3EMUL users will be asked if they wish to save
- the file as filename.TMP, which won't be overwritten the next time they try to
- edit the same host file.
-
- In order for host editing to work, the default assumptions are:
-
- 1. The OS2 communications manager has been installed and is working
-
- 2. You're logged on to a VM host system and your session has no program
- active.
-
- 3. The package 'ALMCOPY' has been installed properly. (i.e. ALMCOPY.EXE can be
- found in the current path.)
-
- 4. You don't want multiple logical terminal session support.
-
- If you want to change any of the above defaults you'll have to put your
- configuration information in MYCNF.E and recompile EPM. See the HOST_SUPPORT
- configuration constant.
-
- A common change would be to support multiple logical terminals. A good way to
- do that is to use E3EMUL, or the SRPI package available as part of LaMail/PM.
- It is strongly suggested you read their documentation if installing them.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14.2. Using E3EMUL for host editing ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- E3EMUL allows host file editing through IBM licensed emulators, such as IBM's
- OS/2 Extended Edition Communications Manager. E3EMUL even works with multiple
- sessions, such as Communication Manager's multiple 3270 emulation sessions. You
- may specify a default LT (Logical Terminal)/window to use, but you may edit a
- file from any or all host sessions during an editing session.
-
- To differentiate between LT windows, you can specify a host session ID between
- the h and the colon, e.g.:
-
- edit ha:profile exec
- edit hb:test file
-
- E3EMUL does strict syntax checking on your specified filename. This is because
- it tries to determine what sort of file you have asked to edit. The usage of
- predetermined defaults allows you to be less than specific when editing host
- files. For example, you can edit the documentation for EPM on the host with the
- command:
-
- E EPM SCRIPT
- E3EMUL fills in the rest, and carries the full filename of HA:EPM SCRIPT A
- through the editing session. Ambiguous references are resolved with a bias
- toward VM filenames.
-
- Note: When entering host file names on the OS/2 command line (as opposed to
- from EPM's command line), you should always specify the H: prefix. This is
- because otherwise EPM prefixes the names specified with the current directory,
- and so when E3EMUL gets the command line, it looks like c:\.profile c:\exec,
- and isn't recognised as a host file.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15. Including New Features into the Default Configuration ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Many users will wish to change or add features to EPM, but will not care to
- learn the full E macro language. Many new features can be added by installing
- add-on packages. Often the only change needed to add such a package to the
- editor is to add one line to one of the .E files that includes that package
- into the file.
-
- The preferred place to put the include statement is in a file of your own, not
- in the distributed .E files. It is tempting to put your includes in the main
- EPM.E file, but this will cause you extra work when new versions of EPM are
- released; you'd need to re-add your includes to the new EPM.E. Instead, put
- your includes in a file named MYKEYS.E, MYSTUFF.E, MYMAIN.E, MYSELECT.E, or
- MYKEYSET.E. (Listed in order of usefulness; most packages can be installed in
- MYKEYS.E or MYSTUFF.E.) The E compiler will automatically include those
- filenames if they exist.
-
- Here are some sample includes to show how the MY*.E files might be used.
-
- o MYKEYS.E should contain any code which defines new keys. Perhaps you have
- redefined one or more key(s) in a file called NEWKEYS.E, as follows:
-
- def c_k=
- Getline Line
- InsertLine Line, .line + 1
-
- In this case, the Ctrl-K key is defined to duplicate the current line.
-
- To activate this new definition, simply add the following line to the
- MYKEYS.E:
-
- include 'newkeys.e'
-
- Including a file in the file MYKEYS.E insures that the key will be recognized
- in the proper place, and not be included in a special-case keyset.
- o MYSTUFF.E should contain packages which define non-key features, such as
- commands and procedures, for example:
-
- include 'e3code.e'
-
- Note: Most users will not care whether a package defines a key or a command.
- Don't worry about the distinction, since in the current EPM it makes no
- difference. You can include a package in either MYKEYS.E or MYSTUFF.E.
- o MYMAIN.E will typically contain small pieces of code to set options at E's
- start-up, especially options that we didn't provide as part of the standard
- configuration file STDCNF.E. Any code in MYMAIN.E will be included at the end
- of E's start-up code (DEFMAIN).
- o MYSELECT.E can contain anything you want to be executed whenever you select a
- different file. Typical tasks here are setting tabs and margins based on
- filetype, or selecting keysets based on filetype (this is how the
- syntax-editing keys are selected).
- o MYKEYSET.E is the least frequently used addition. Not many users will define
- an entirely new keyset.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16. Changing the Default Configuration ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- A distinguishing feature of EPM is its configurability. It allows the user to
- change its standard modes of operation, as well as add new commands and delete
- unwanted commands. This is possible because a significant portion of the editor
- (known as macro definitions) is written in a high level programming language
- (the E language). This language can be learned easily by experienced
- programmers using The EPM Editor Technical Reference Manual and the delivered
- source code as a guide.
-
- EPM has a Quick Configuration option to allow for easy update of some of the
- most popular configuration variables (i.e. colors and margins). See Changing
- Common Default Values for information on the shortcut approach. Not all
- variables are included there. This section explains how to change any and all
- of the default features in EPM.
-
- Note: If you change the same values in MYCNF.E and in the Quick Configure
- menu, those in Quick Configure will take precedence.
-
- You can also change the way the editor performs by changing the source code,
- which comes as a collection of ASCII files with extension .E. The source code
- is translated by a compiler (ETPM) into a file with extension .EX which will be
- loaded automatically by EPM as it starts execution. (See Compiling Macros.) The
- standard file EPM.EX is delivered in the initial EPM package and contains
- default information.
-
- Making elaborate changes, for example redefining commands or keys to perform
- differently, involves learning the E language and modifying the code. However,
- more simple changes to the layout of the editor can be made much more easily.
- Constants set in the files STDCNF.E and COLORS.E control the colors displayed
- on the screen, margin settings, tab settings, cursor sizes, insert mode status,
- terminal emulator to be used for editing host files, etc. You need very little
- experience to create a MYCNF.E that tailors the editor to your preferences
- without having to learn the E programming language. A sample MYCNF.SMP is
- included in EMACROS.FLS as a guide. You can override the STDCNF.E settings by
- using MYCNF.E. This has two advantages:
-
- 1. You can easily upgrade to new versions by dropping in the new files. No
- more need to merge your modified STDCNF.E with our new one, or to worry
- about accidentally overlaying your carefully customized version with ours.
-
- 2. Macro writers can include your MYCNF and use the constants the way that you
- defined them even if their routines aren't included in the base set of E
- code.
-
- Therefore, we strongly suggest that you create a MYCNF.E file if you want to
- make changes to the standard configuration. Do not make changes directly to
- STDCNF.E or COLORS.E (or, for that matter, to any of the distributed files).
-
- In the following, where you read change FOO in STDCNF, you should interpret
- this to mean find the line defining FOO in STDCNF.E, copy that to your MYCNF.E,
- and change the value in the copy.
-
- There are three sections to STDCNF.E, setting different types of defaults, and
- each can be overridden in the MYCNF.E file. The first section contains SET
- statements, the second section defines constants, and the third section
- initializes various global variables. To override the first section, you simply
- include the appropriate SET statement in your MYCNF. (The ones in STDCNF.E are
- commented out, and exist just to document the defaults.) To override the second
- section, simply define the constants. To override the third section, define a
- MY_variablename set to the desired value.
-
- Comments in STDCNF.E explain this in more detail, and examples of each can be
- seen in the sample MYCNF.SMP.
-
- Note: One user we know recommends copying the entire STDCNF.E into MYCNF.E in
- order to have all the spelling and the internal documentation handy. This is
- not a good idea. STDCNF.E contains some code executed when an EPM window is
- opened. MYCNF.E should contain no executable code. It should contain only SET,
- CONST and DEFINE statements. This is so that separately compiled routines can
- include MYCNF.E to pick up your preferences, without having any unexpected side
- effects.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.1. The Defaults ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- This section of MYCNF.E lists all of the modifiable options, their default
- values, and all possible values. You simply have to add the appropriate
- assignment to your MYCNF.E.
-
- After making one or more of the changes described here, you must compile
- (translate) the .E files. This can be done two ways. At the editor command
- line, type the command ETPM. This will invoke ETPM.EXE with the default
- filenames. The advantage of doing this from within EPM is the ease of
- correcting a syntax error (if there is one). EPM will automatically load the
- offending file and position the cursor to the error (or occasionally one line
- after it). You can also go to an OS/2 command prompt, and issue etpm epm from
- there. Before either method, make sure your current directory is the one where
- the E files are stored.
-
- String values of configuration options need not be entirely uppercase. A string
- value may be composed of any combination of upper and lower case letters. All
- strings will be converted to entirely uppercase letters by ETPM (the compiler)
- when comparisons are done.
-
- See Compiling Macros for more information.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.2. Sample Reconfiguration ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- One of the most common questions is how to change the default colors and
- margins. This section will walk a user through the steps needed to reconfigure
- EPM's default colors and margins.
-
- 1. Edit the file MYCNF.E.
- 2. enter the following lines lines of text into the MYCNF file:
-
- const
- DEFAULT_MARGINS = '1 75 5'
-
- compile if defined('BLACK')
- define
- WINDOWCOLOR = YELLOW + BLUEB
- TEXTCOLOR = WINDOWCOLOR
- MODIFIED_WINDOWCOLOR = WINDOWCOLOR
- DRAGCOLOR = LIGHT_BLUE + GREENB
- compile endif
-
- 3. Use F4 to save MYCNF and quit.
- 4. Move to the OS/2 prompt.
- 5. Change directories to the directory where your .E files are stored.
- 6. Enter the command:
-
- etpm epm
-
- 7. Providing no typing errors were made (ETPM will report these), the changes
- should be made. Opening a new EPM edit window should show the changes to
- the color scheme and the margin setups.
- These changes are only examples. See the next section for more information on
- what these changes mean and how to customize EPM for your own particular needs.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3. Summary of Configuration Constants ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- The following section lists all the configuration constants used by EPM, along
- with their possible values.
-
- Note: The majority of these constants should follow a CONST statement in the
- MYCNF.E. The exception is the constants that set a color (DRAGCOLOR,
- MARKCOLOR, MESSAGECOLOR, STATUSCOLOR, TEXTCOLOR); these should follow a
- DEFINE statement. The reason for this is that they are already defined
- in COLORS.E, and constants set via CONST can not be redefined with
- different values, but compile-time variables set via DEFINE can be.
-
- ADDENDASUPPORT
- Include addenda-file support in spell-checking.
- ALLOW_PROMPTING_AT_TOP
- Should Prompting and Info at Top choices be connected.
- ALTERNATE_KEYSETS
- Include support for syntax assist and user-defined keysets.
- ASSIST_TRIGGER
- Use Enter or Ctrl+Enter to trigger syntax assist.
- AUTOSAVE_PATH
- Default autosave path.
- BACKUP_PATH
- Default backup path.
- BLOCK_ACTIONBAR_ACCELERATORS
- Should Alt+letter perform the editor-defined action, or activate the
- corresponding action bar menu.
- BLOCK_ALT_KEY
- Should tapping the Alt key activate the action bar.
- CALL_USER_FTO
- Enable a user exit for setting file transfer options when saving a
- host file.
- CHECK_FOR_LEXAM
- Should the presence of the spell-checking library be checked at run
- time.
- COMPILER_ERROR_COLOR
- Specify the color that lines with compiler errors will be displayed
- in, when EPM is called from the IBM Workframe/2.
- CORE_STUFF
- Include CORE-specific definitions.
- C_ENTER_ACTION
- Action performed by the Ctrl+Enter key.
- C_MARGINS
- Define margins for C files.
- C_SYNTAX_ASSIST
- Specify whether syntax assistance for C should be included.
- C_TABS
- Define tabs for E files.
- DEBUG
- Include debug messages in E3EMUL.
- DECIMAL
- Specify the character used for the decimal point.
- DEFAULT_AUTOSAVE
- Specify how many changes should occur between autosaves.
- DEFAULT_FILEMODE
- Specify the default filemode for VM files.
- DEFAULT_MARGINS
- Define margins for files without extension-specific defaults.
- DEFAULT_PASTE
- Default paste mode - as a line, block, or character mark.
- DEFAULT_TABS
- Define tabs for files without extension-specific defaults.
- DIRECTORYOF_STRING
- Specify the "Directory of" string that appears when a DIR command is
- executed.
- DRAGCOLOR
- Specify the color used when drag-marking.
- DRAG_ALWAYS_MARKS
- Specify whether a drag will start a mark even if a mark already
- exists.
- DUPLICATES_ALLOWED
- Specify whether duplicate bookmark names are allowed.
- ENHANCED_ENTER_KEYS
- Specify whether support for dynamically changing the actions assigned
- to the Enter key combinations is included.
- ENHANCED_PRINT_SUPPORT
- Specify whether support for the print dialog is included.
- ENTER_ACTION
- Action performed by the Enter key.
- EPATH
- Specify what path should be searched for .e files.
- EPM_POINTER
- Specify the default pointer type.
- EPM_SHELL_PROMPT
- Specify the prompt to be used in the shell window.
- EXTRA_EX
- Specify whether code should be split between EPM.EX and EXTRA.EX
- (required for normal-sized configurations).
- E_MARGINS
- Define margins for E files.
- E_SYNTAX_ASSIST
- Specify whether syntax assistance for C should be included.
- E_TABS
- Define tabs for E files.
- FIX_CURSOR
- Set this if the cursor disappears after saving a host file.
- HELPFILENAME
- Specify the name of the file loaded when Help / Quick reference is
- selected.
- HIGHLIGHT_COLOR
- Specify that found strings should be circled.
- HOSTCOPYDRIVE
- Specify the host drive letter used for the HOSTCOPY command.
- HOSTCOPYOPTIONS
- Specify default options to be passed to the HOSTCOPY command.
- HOSTDRIVE
- Specify what letter should be used to indicate host files.
- HOSTDRIVE_REQUIRED
- Require that the host drive letter be specifed when using E3EMUL.
- HOST_LT_REQUIRED
- Require that the host logical terminal ID be specifed to indicate a
- host file.
- HOST_SUPPORT
- Specify the type of support to be included for editing files on a VM
- or MVS host.
- INCLUDE_MATHLIB
- Specify whether math support routines should be compiled in or linked
- when needed.
- INCLUDE_MENU_SUPPORT
- Specify whether menu support should be included.
- INCLUDE_WORKFRAME_SUPPORT
- Specify whether support for the IBM Workframe/2 should be included.
- I_LIKE_A_SEMICOLON_SUPPLIED_AFTER_DEFAULT
- Specify whether a ';' should be supplied after a 'default' in C
- syntax assist.
- I_LIKE_MY_CASES_UNDER_MY_SWITCH
- Specify whether 'case' should be aligned under 'switch' in C syntax
- assist.
- KEEP_CURSOR_ON_SCREEN
- Specify whether the cursor should be allowed to be scolled off the
- screen using the scroll bars.
- KEYWORD_HELP_INDEX_FILE
- Specify the default index file to be used for keyword help.
- LINK_HOST_SUPPORT
- Specify whether host support should be linked as an external file.
- LOCAL_MOUSE_SUPPORT
- Specify whether support should be included for file-specific mouse
- definitions.
- MAINFILE
- Specify the file to be compiled by ETPM if no name is given.
- MARKCOLOR
- Specify the color to be used for marked text.
- MENU_LIMIT
- Allow for the inclusion of a Ring menu. (Not recommended.)
- MESSAGECOLOR
- Specify the color to be used for the message line.
- MODIFIED_MARKCOLOR
- Specify the color to be used for marked text in a modified file.
- MODIFIED_WINDOWCOLOR
- Specify the color to be used for normal text in a modified file.
- MOUSE_SUPPORT
- Specify whether (and how) mouse support should be included.
- MVS
- Specify whether support should be included for editing files on an
- MVS host.
- MY_ADDENDA_FILENAME
- Specify a default addenda file name for spell-checking.
- MY_APPNAME
- Specify the application name to be used in the .INI file.
- MY_BINOPTIONS
- Specify default options for binary file transfers.
- MY_CENTER_SEARCH
- Specify the default initial value for CENTER_SEARCH.
- MY_CUA_MARKING_SWITCH
- Specify whether CUA marking should initially be on or off.
- MY_CUA_MENU_ACCEL
- Specify the initial mode for blocking the action bar accelerators.
- MY_DEFAULT_EDIT_OPTIONS
- Specify default options to be used on EDIT commands.
- MY_DEFAULT_SAVE_OPTIONS
- Specify default options to be used on SAVE commands.
- MY_DEFAULT_SEARCH_OPTIONS
- Specify default options to be used on LOCATE commands.
- MY_DICTIONARY_FILENAME
- Specify the default dictionary filename to be used for spell
- checking.
- MY_EXPAND_ON
- Specify whether syntax expansion should initially be on or off.
- MY_EXTRA_EX_NAME
- Specify the name to be used for the EXTRA.EX file.
- MY_FTOPTIONS
- Specify default file transfer options for ASCII files.
- MY_HOSTCMD
- Specify the default command to be used for issuing host commands.
- MY_HOSTCOPY
- Specify the default command to be used for transferring files to the
- host.
- MY_HOSTDRIVE
- Specify what letter should be used to indicate host files.
- MY_JOIN_AFTER_WRAP
- Specify the initial value for the JOIN_AFTER_WRAP switch.
- MY_KEEP_TEMP_FILES
- Specify whether temporary files should be erased after use during
- host file editing.
- MY_LT
- Specify the default logical terminal to be used for host file
- editing.
- MY_MATCHTAB_ON
- Specify the initial MATCHTAB setting.
- MY_MENU_PROMPT
- Specify whether menu prompting should start out on or off.
- MY_MOUSESTYLE
- Specify the default mouse behavior in Advanced Marking mode.
- MY_PRINTER
- Specify the default printer.
- MY_REXX_PROFILE
- Specify whether profile support should initially be on or off.
- MY_RING_ENABLED
- Specify whether the presence of the edit ring should initially be
- hidden.
- MY_SAVEPATH
- Specify a default SAVEPATH for host file editing.
- MY_SAVE_WITH_TABS
- Specify if EPM should convert multiple spaces to tabs when saving.
- MY_SCRIPT_FILE_TYPE
- Specify an additional file type that shoule be considered a SCRIPT
- file during spell checking.
- MY_SHOW_LONGNAMES
- Specify the initial value for LONGNAMES support.
- MY_STAY
- Specify the initial STAY default.
- MY_STREAM_MODE
- Specify whether stream mode should start out on or off.
- MY_TWO_SPACES
- Specify whether 1 or 2 spaces should be used at the end of a sentence
- during text reflow.
- NLS_LANGUAGE
- Specify the language to be used for text strings.
- NO_DUPLICATE_BOOKMARKS
- Specify if duplicate bookmarks should be disallowed.
- NO_ESCAPE
- Specify if the Escape key should not activate the command dialog.
- PROCESSNAME_CMD
- Specify the command used when the filename is directly edited on the
- title bar.
- PROOF_DIALOG_FIXED
- Specify that the PROOF dialog always appear in a fixed location,
- instead of under the word being proofed.
- P_MARGINS
- Define margins for Pascal files.
- P_SYNTAX_ASSIST
- Specify whether syntax assistance for Pascal should be included.
- P_TABS
- Define tabs for Pascal files.
- RECEIVE_CMD
- Specify the name of the RECEIVE command.
- RESPECT_CASE_FOR_ADDENDA
- Specify whether the case of words in the addenda should be respected.
- RESTORE_MARK_AFTER_SORT
- Specify whether the mark should be restored after a sort operation.
- REXX_MARGINS
- Define margins for Rexx files.
- REXX_SYNTAX_ASSIST
- Specify whether syntax assistance for Rexx should be included.
- REXX_TABS
- Define tabs for Rexx files.
- RING_OPTIONAL
- Specify whether EPM should include support for hiding the presence of
- the edit ring.
- RUNTIME
- Specify if runtime support for changing E3EMUL settings should be
- included.
- SEND_CMD
- Specify the name of the SEND command.
- SETSTAY
- Specify where the cursor should be after a Change command.
- SHIFT_BLOCK_ONLY
- Specify if shifting a block should also move text to the right of the
- mark.
- SHOW_MODIFY_METHOD
- Specify how modified files should be displayed.
- SHOW_MODIFY_TEXT
- Specify the text to be included in the title bar for modified files.
- SMARTFILE
- Specify if the File key should Quit if there were no changes.
- SMARTSAVE
- Specify if the Save key should prompt you if there were no changes.
- SORT_TYPE
- Specify the type of sort routine that should be included.
- SPELL_SUPPORT
- Specify whether spell-checking support should be included.
- STATUSCOLOR
- Specify te default color for the status line.
- STATUS_TEMPLATE
- Specify the default text that should appear on the status line.
- SUPPORT_BOOK_ICON
- Specify if Book Icon should appear on the Options menu.
- SUPPORT_TECHREF
- Specify if View Technical Reference should appear on the Help menu.
- SUPPORT_USER_EXITS
- Specify if hooks for user exits should be included.
- SUPPORT_USERS_GUIDE
- Specify if View User's Guide should appear on the Help menu.
- SYNTAX_INDENT
- Specify the indentation to be used for syntax assist.
- TEMP_FILENAME
- Specify the name of a temporary file (including path).
- TEMP_PATH
- Specify the path to be used for temporary files.
- TEXTCOLOR
- Specify the default color to be used for normal text.
- TOGGLE_ESCAPE
- Specify whether the ESCAPEKEY command should be defined.
- TOGGLE_TAB
- Specify whether the TABKEY command should be defined.
- TOP_OF_FILE_VALID
- Specify whether the user should be allowed to position the cursor on
- line 0.
- TRASH_TEMP_FILES
- Specify whether temporary files should get the "Quitting file" dialog
- if an attempt is made to quit them when they have been modified.
- UNDERLINE_CURSOR
- Specify that the cursor should be an underline instead of a vertical
- bar.
- UNMARK_AFTER_MOVE
- Set to automatically unmark after a move mark operation.
- USE_ANSI_C_NOTATION
- Specify if ANSI C notation should be used for the MAIN expansion in C
- syntax assist.
- USE_APPEND
- Specify if files not found in the current directory should be
- searched for in the DPATH.
- USE_EHLLAPI
- Specify if EHLLAPI calls should be used to invoke SEND and RECEIVE.
- USING
- Specify the file transfer protocol to be used when editing host
- files.
- VALID_LTS
- Specify the list of valid logical terminal identifiers.
- VANILLA
- Omit all user-written macro code.
- VM
- Specify if support should be included for editing files on a VM host.
- WANT_ALL
- Specify if the ALL command should be included.
- WANT_APPLICATION_INI_FILE
- Specify if support should be included for saving information in an
- application INI file.
- WANT_BOOKMARKS
- Specify if bookmark support should be included.
- WANT_BRACE_BELOW_STATEMENT
- Specify if braces should appear below the statement in C syntax
- assist.
- WANT_BRACKET_MATCHING
- Specify if bracket-matching code should be included.
- WANT_CHAR_OPS
- Specify if support for character marks should be included.
- WANT_CUA_MARKING
- Specify if support for the CUA-style marking should be included.
- WANT_DBCS_SUPPORT
- Specify if support for DBCS text should be included.
- WANT_DM_BUFFER
- Specify if text deleted via a delete_mark operation should be saved
- in a buffer.
- WANT_DOSUTIL
- Specify whether the OS-related functions in DOSUTIL.E should be
- included.
- WANT_DRAW
- Specify if the DRAW command should be included.
- WANT_DYNAMIC_PROMPTS
- Specify if support should be included for dynamic menu prompts.
- WANT_EBOOKIE
- Specify if support for EBOOKIE should be included.
- WANT_EPM_SHELL
- Specify if support for the EPM shell window should be included.
- WANT_ET_COMMAND
- Specify if support for the ETPM command should be included.
- WANT_GET_ENV
- Specify if the GET_ENV routine should be included.
- WANT_KEYWORD_HELP
- Specify if support for keyword help should be included.
- WANT_LAN_SUPPORT
- Specify if file locking support should be included.
- WANT_LONGNAMES
- Specify if support of the .LONGNAME EA should be included.
- WANT_MATH
- Specify if the math-related commands should be included.
- WANT_NODISMISS_MENUS
- Specify if the Preferences and Frame Controls menus should stay
- active.
- WANT_PROFILE
- Specify if support for a Rexx profile should be included.
- WANT_SEARCH_PATH
- Specify is the search_path routine should be included.
- WANT_STACK_CMDS
- Specify if the (mark and cursor position) stack commands should be
- included.
- WANT_STREAM_MODE
- Specify is support for stream-mode editing should be included.
- WANT_TAGS
- Specify if support for tags files should be included.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.1. ADDENDASUPPORT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set ADDENDASUPPORT in MYCNF.E to control whether or not support for an addenda
- file (user additions to dictionary) is included as part of the spell checking
- support.
-
- The default value for ADDENDASUPPORT is 1. Possible values are:
-
- 0 Omit support.
-
- 1 Include support
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.2. ALLOW_PROMPTING_AT_TOP ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set ALLOW_PROMPTING_AT_TOP in MYCNF.E to specify whether the Prompting and Info
- at Top choices of the Frame Controls pull-right menu on the Options menu are
- inter-connected.
-
- The default value for ALLOW_PROMPTING_AT_TOP is 0. Possible values are:
-
- 0 When Info at Top is turned on, Prompting will be turned off; when
- Prompting is turned on, Info at Top will be turned off. The net effect
- will be that selecting a menu can never have the menu hiding the prompt.
-
- 1 The menu selections are independent.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.3. ALTERNATE_KEYSETS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set ALTERNATE_KEYSETS in MYCNF.E to control whether or not support for
- alternate keysets is included. This acts as a master switch for
- C_SYNTAX_ASSIST, E_SYNTAX_ASSIST, P_SYNTAX_ASSIST, and REXX_SYNTAX_ASSIST, as
- well as controlling whether MYKEYSET.E is included.
-
- The default value for ALTERNATE_KEYSETS is 1. Possible values are:
-
- 0 Don't define any other keysets.
-
- 1 Define the keysets indicated by the above constants and in MYKEYSET.E.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.4. ASSIST_TRIGGER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set ASSIST_TRIGGER in MYCNF.E to specify which key should trigger syntax
- assist.
-
- The default value for ASSIST_TRIGGER is 'ENTER' Possible values are:
-
- 'ENTER' The Enter key will be the trigger.
-
- 'C_ENTER' the Ctrl+Enter key will be the trigger.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.5. AUTOSAVE_PATH ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set AUTOSAVE_PATH in MYCNF.E to specify the directory in which autosave files
- will be saved.
-
- The default value for AUTOSAVE_PATH is the null string, which means that the
- current directory will be used.
-
- Note: The value set in the MYCNF.E can be overridden by the value set in the
- Paths page of the Settings dialog.
-
- Related configuration constants:
-
- DEFAULT_AUTOSAVE
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.6. BACKUP_PATH ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set BACKUP_PATH in MYCNF.E to specify the directory in which backup files will
- be saved. Whenever a file is saved, the old version will be copied to the
- backup directory.
-
- The default value for BACKUP_PATH is the null string, which means that no
- backup files will be kept. It can be set to '=', which means that the directory
- of the file being saved will be used, or to any subdirectory (which must end
- with a trailing backslash).
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.7. BLOCK_ACTIONBAR_ACCELERATORS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Whenever an action bar entry has a mnemonic defined, PM automatically defines
- it as an accelerator key. This blocks the normal action defined for that key
- in EPM. Taking NLS translations into account, this would essentially mean
- giving up all of the Alt+letter keys. Since we found this unacceptable, we
- defined the keys as accelerators ourself in order to bypass the PM definition.
-
- Set BLOCK_ACTIONBAR_ACCELERATORS in MYCNF.E to control whether or not these
- accelerator keys are definined by EPM.
-
- The default value for BLOCK_ACTIONBAR_ACCELERATORS is 1. Possible values are:
-
- 0 Don't block the PM definitions, so that Alt+C will go to the action bar
- Command menu, etc.
-
- 1 Define accelerator table entries to block the PM defaults, so Alt+C will
- perform a Copy Mark operation, etc.
-
- 'SWITCH' Support both marking modes, and allow the user to change back and
- forth between them (via an entry on the Preferences selection of the
- Options menu).
-
- Related configuration constants:
-
- MY_CUA_MENU_ACCEL
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.8. BLOCK_ALT_KEY ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set BLOCK_ALT_KEY in MYCNF.E to define the Alt key as an accelerator. PM
- defines the Alt key so that pressing and releasing it will give focus to the
- action bar. Some users find this annoying, so EPM lets you redefine it to not
- do this.
-
- The default value for BLOCK_ALT_KEY is 0 Possible values are:
-
- 0 Pressing and releasing the Alt key will go to the action bar.
-
- 1 Pressing and releasing the Alt key will just beep.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.9. CALL_USER_FTO ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set CALL_USER_FTO in MYCNF.E to have a User_FTO() routine called to set the
- file transfer options when saving a host file (if HOST_SUPPORT is set to
- 'EMUL'). See E3EMUL.E for a sample User_FTO() routine.
-
- The default value for CALL_USER_FTO is 0. Possible values are:
-
- 0 Don't try to call a user exit.
-
- 1 Call the user exit when saving.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.10. CHECK_FOR_LEXAM ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set CHECK_FOR_LEXAM in MYCNF.E to have the LEXAM DLL checked for at run time,
- and spell support added to the Options menu only if it is found. This also
- controls whether the Dictionary File and Personal Dictionary entries are
- present on the Paths page of the Settings dialog.
-
- The default value for CHECK_FOR_LEXAM is 0. Possible values are:
-
- 0 Don't see if LEXAM.DLL is present.
-
- 1 Check to see if LEXAM.DLL is present.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.11. COMPILER_ERROR_COLOR ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set COMPILER_ERROR_COLOR in MYCNF.E to control what color lines containing
- errors are displayed in when EPM is invoked from the Workframe/2.
-
- The default value for COMPILER_ERROR_COLOR is 244, or red on a white
- background. Possible values are any combination of foreground and background
- colors as defined in COLORS.E.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.12. CORE_STUFF ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set CORE_STUFF in MYCNF.E to determine whether CORE-specific code is included.
-
- The default value for CORE_STUFF is 0. Possible values are:
-
- 0 Not being compiled for the CORE environment.
-
- 1 Being compiled for the CORE environment.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.13. C_ENTER_ACTION ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set C_ENTER_ACTION in MYCNF.E to specify what action should be performed by the
- Ctrl+Enter key. If ENHANCED_ENTER_KEYS is set to 0, this controls the behavior
- of a my_c_enter() routine that will be called when the Ctrl+Enter key is
- pressed. If ENHANCED_ENTER_KEYS is set to 1, this only sets the initial value
- for the Ctrl+Enter and Ctrl+PadEnter keys.
-
- The default value for C_ENTER_ACTION is 'NEXTLINE' Possible values are:
-
- 'ADDLINE' Insert a line after the current line.
-
- 'NEXTLINE' Move to the next line without inserting a line.
-
- 'ADDATEND' ADDLINE if on last line, else NEXTLINE.
-
- 'DEPENDS' NEXTLINE if in insert_mode, else ADDLINE.
-
- 'DEPENDS+' ADDLINE if on last line, else DEPENDS.
-
- 'STREAM' Act like stream editors; Ctrl+Enter splits a line.
-
- '' Don't define a my_c_enter() routine; user will supply one (in
- MYSTUFF.E). Only meaningful if ENHANCED_ENTER_KEYS is set to 0,
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.14. C_MARGINS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set C_MARGINS in MYCNF.E to specify what the margins should be when editing C
- files if C_SYNTAX_ASSIST is enabled.
-
- The default value for C_MARGINS is 1 MAXMARGIN 1, where MAXMARGIN is one less
- than the maximum length of a line. (MAXMARGIN is 254 for EPM versions prior to
- 5.60.) You can specify any valid margins, or set to 0 to indicate that no
- special margins should be set for C files.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.15. C_SYNTAX_ASSIST ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set C_SYNTAX_ASSIST in MYCNF.E to control whether syntax assist for the C
- language is included.
-
- The default value for C_SYNTAX_ASSIST is 1. Possible values are:
-
- 0 Omit support
-
- 1 Include support
-
- Related configuration constants:
-
- ALTERNATE_KEYSETS
- MY_EXPAND_ON
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.16. C_TABS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set C_TABS in MYCNF.E to set the default tabs setting for C files.
-
- The default value for C_TABS is 3. You can specify any valid tabs setting, or
- set to 0 to indicate that no special tabs should be set for C files.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.17. DEBUG ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set DEBUG in MYCNF.E to cause debugging messages to be output by E3EMUL.E.
- This is not normally set by the end user.
-
- The default value for DEBUG is 0. Possible values are:
-
- 0 No debug messages.
-
- 1 Give messages.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.18. DECIMAL ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set DECIMAL in MYCNF.E to specify what character is used to represent the
- decimal point in the math-related commands.
-
- The default value for DECIMAL is '.'.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.19. DEFAULT_AUTOSAVE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set DEFAULT_AUTOSAVE in MYCNF.E to specify the number of changes that can be
- made to a file before an autosave is performed.
-
- The default value for DEFAULT_AUTOSAVE is 100.
-
- Note: The value set in the MYCNF.E can be overridden by the value set in the
- Autosave page of the Settings dialog.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.20. DEFAULT_FILEMODE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set DEFAULT_FILEMODE in MYCNF.E to specify what filemode should be assumed by
- E3EMUL for host files whose file mode is not specified.
-
- The default value for DEFAULT_FILEMODE is 'A'. Some users might prefer '*', but
- this should not be set before determining what effect a file mode of '*' will
- have when saving a host file using your file transfer program.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.21. DEFAULT_MARGINS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set DEFAULT_MARGINS in MYCNF.E to specify the initial default margins for files
- not having syntax assist support available.
-
- The default value for DEFAULT_MARGINS is 1 MAXMARGIN 1, where MAXMARGIN is one
- less than the maximum length of a line. (MAXMARGIN is 254 for EPM versions
- prior to 5.60.) You can specify any valid margins.
-
- Note: The value set in the MYCNF.E can be overridden by the value set in the
- Margins page of the Settings dialog.
-
- Related configuration constants:
-
- C_MARGINS
- E_MARGINS
- P_MARGINS
- REXX_MARGINS
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.22. DEFAULT_PASTE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set DEFAULT_PASTE in MYCNF.E to specify which type of PASTE should be performed
- by the Shift+Insert key.
-
- The default value for DEFAULT_PASTE is 'C'. Possible values are:
-
- '' Paste as new lines.
-
- 'B' Paste as a block.
-
- 'C' Paste as a character stream.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.23. DEFAULT_TABS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set DEFAULT_TABS in MYCNF.E to specify the initial default tabs for files not
- having syntax assist support available.
-
- The default value for DEFAULT_TABS is 8.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.24. DIRECTORYOF_STRING ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set DIRECTORYOF_STRING in MYCNF.E to the string equivalent to "Directory of"
- that is output by the OS/2 DIR command.
-
- The default value for DIRECTORYOF_STRING is DIR_OF__MSG, which is defined in
- ENGLISH.E or your NLS language version. You might want to specify a different
- value if you are using the English-language version of EPM on a non-English
- version of OS/2.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.25. DRAGCOLOR ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set DRAGCOLOR in MYCNF.E to specify what color should be used to display the
- marked area while drag-marking with the mouse.
-
- If DRAGCOLOR is not set, then the MARKCOLOR will be used.
-
- Note: DRAGCOLOR is used for line and character marks; inverse video is used
- for performance reasons when drag-marking a block mark.
-
- Note: Must follow a DEFINE, not a CONST.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.26. DRAG_ALWAYS_MARKS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set DRAG_ALWAYS_MARKS in MYCNF.E to specify whether dragging the mouse should
- always start a new mark.
-
- The default value for DRAG_ALWAYS_MARKS is 0. Possible values are:
-
- 0 Don't start a new mark if one exists; instead, warn the user.
-
- 1 Always start a new mark; do an Unmark first if necessary.
-
- Note: This applies only to advanced marking mode; a new mark is always started
- in the CUA-style basic marking mode.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.27. DUPLICATES_ALLOWED ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set DUPLICATES_ALLOWED in MYCNF.E to specify whether more than one instance of
- a host file is allowed to be loaded into an edit ring when using E3EMUL.E for
- host support.
-
- The default value for DUPLICATES_ALLOWED is 1. Possible values are:
-
- 0 Don't allow the same host file to appear more than once in the ring.
-
- 1 Allow multiple copies.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.28. ENHANCED_ENTER_KEYS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set ENHANCED_ENTER_KEYS in MYCNF.E to specify whether support should be
- included for dynamically setting the action performed by the Enter keys (Enter,
- Alt+Enter, Ctrl+Enter, Shift+Enter, PadEnter, Alt+PadEnter, Ctrl+PadEnter,
- Shift+PadEnter).
-
- The default value for ENHANCED_ENTER_KEYS is 0. Possible values are:
-
- 0 The Ctrl+Enter and Ctrl+PadEnter keys are set to the action indicated by
- the C_ENTER_ACTION configuration constant, and the remaining Enter keys
- are set to the action indicated by the ENTER_ACTION configuration
- constant.
-
- 1 The Enter keys can be set dynamically via a Keys page on the Settings
- dialog.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.29. ENHANCED_PRINT_SUPPORT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set ENHANCED_PRINT_SUPPORT in MYCNF.E to specify whether the Print entries on
- the File and Edit menus bring up the Print Dialog, or simply print the file or
- marked area (in draft mode) to the default printer
-
- The default value for ENHANCED_PRINT_SUPPORT is 0. Possible values are:
-
- 0 Print menu items print to the default printer
-
- 1 Print menu items activate the Print Dialog.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.30. ENTER_ACTION ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set ENTER_ACTION in MYCNF.E to specify what action should be performed by the
- Enter keys (Enter, Alt+Enter, Shify+Enter, PadEnter,Alt+PadEnter,
- Shift+PadEnter). If ENHANCED_ENTER_KEYS is set to 0, this controls the behavior
- of a my_enter() routine that will be called when one of the Enter keys is
- pressed. If ENHANCED_ENTER_KEYS is set to 1, this only sets the initial value
- for the Enter keys.
-
- The default value for ENTER_ACTION is 'ADDLINE'. Possible values are:
-
- 'ADDLINE' Insert a line after the current line.
-
- 'NEXTLINE' Move to the next line without inserting a line.
-
- 'ADDATEND' ADDLINE if on last line, else NEXTLINE.
-
- 'DEPENDS' ADDLINE if in insert_mode, else NEXTLINE.
-
- 'DEPENDS+' ADDLINE if on last line, else DEPENDS.
-
- 'STREAM' Act like stream editors; Enter splits a line at the cursor
- position.
-
- '' Don't define a my_enter() routine; user will supply one (in
- MYSTUFF.E). Only meaningful if ENHANCED_ENTER_KEYS is set to 0,
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.31. EPATH ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set EPATH in MYCNF.E to specify the name of the environment variable used by
- EPM to search for editor-specific files. For example, the EPATH and OPENPATH
- commands use this as the default path to search.
-
- The default value for EPATH is 'EPMPATH'.
-
- Note: The editor path is also set internally by the editor, and can not be
- changed by the user. EPATH should be left as 'EPMPATH' when compiling
- macros for EPM, and set to 'LAMPATH' when compiling macros for LaMail.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.32. EPM_POINTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set EPM_POINTER in MYCNF.E to specify what shape you want the EPM mouse pointer
- to have.
-
- The default value for EPM_POINTER is TEXT_POINTER, or 2. Possible values are
- listed in STDCONST.E; see the _POINTER constants.
-
- compile if defined(SYSTEM_POINTER)
- const
- EPM_POINTER = SYSTEM_POINTER -- I prefer the arrow pointer
- compile endif
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.33. EPM_SHELL_PROMPT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set EPM_SHELL_PROMPT in MYCNF.E to specify a string that will be written to a
- newly-created shell window. This string will generally be a PROMPT command.
-
- The default value for EPM_SHELL_PROMPT is '@prompt epm: $p $g'.
-
- Note: Support for automatically performing a Write to shell when the Enter key
- is pressed in a shell window is only included if EPM_SHELL_PROMPT is
- left at the default value.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.34. EXTRA_EX ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set EXTRA_EX in MYCNF.E to specify that the base function normally included in
- EPM.EX is to be split between EPM.EX and EXTRA.EX. The standard configuration
- is too large to fit into a single 64k .ex file, so this constant must be set to
- 1 unless you are setting other constants to omit a large amount of code.
-
- The default value for EXTRA_EX is 0. Possible values are:
-
- 0 EPM.EX will be a stand-alone file.
-
- 1 EPM.EX will automatically link EXTRA.EX at startup.
-
- Note: When EXTRA_EX is 1, the EPM action bar is built in EXTRA.EX while most
- of the commands used by it are built in EPM.EX. This means that
- whenever a configuration constant affecting the action bar is changed,
- both EPM and EXTRA should be recompiled.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.35. E_MARGINS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set E_MARGINS in MYCNF.E to to specify what the margins should be when editing
- E files if E_SYNTAX_ASSIST is enabled.
-
- The default value for E_MARGINS is 1 MAXMARGIN 1, where MAXMARGIN is one less
- than the maximum length of a line. (MAXMARGIN is 254 for EPM versions prior to
- 5.60.) You can specify any valid margins, or set to 0 to indicate that no
- special margins should be set for E files.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.36. E_SYNTAX_ASSIST ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set E_SYNTAX_ASSIST in MYCNF.E to control whether syntax assist for the E
- language is included.
-
- The default value for E_SYNTAX_ASSIST is 1. Possible values are:
-
- 0 Omit support
-
- 1 Include support
-
- Related configuration constants:
-
- ALTERNATE_KEYSETS
- MY_EXPAND_ON
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.37. E_TABS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set E_TABS in MYCNF.E to set the default tabs setting for E files.
-
- The default value for E_TABS is 3. You can specify any valid tabs setting, or
- set to 0 to indicate that no special tabs should be set for E files.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.38. FIX_CURSOR ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set FIX_CURSOR in MYCNF.E to work around a bug in ALMCOPY which sometimes
- results in the cursor not being restored after a file transfer. If you use
- ALMCOPY for host file transfer, and "lose" the text cursor after loading or
- saving a host file, set FIX_CURSOR=1.
-
- The default value for FIX_CURSOR is 0. Possible values are:
-
- 0 Do nothing special.
-
- 1 Fix the cursor after calling ALMCOPY.
-
- Note: FIX_CURSOR=1 only applies if HOST_SUPPORT is set to 'EMUL'.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.39. HELPFILENAME ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set HELPFILENAME in MYCNF.E to specify the file to be loaded when Quick
- Reference is selected from the Help menu.
-
- The default value for HELPFILENAME is 'epmhelp.qhl'.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.40. HIGHLIGHT_COLOR ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set HIGHLIGHT_COLOR in MYCNF.E to specify that after a successful Locate or
- repeat_find (Ctrl+F) operation, the target string should be highlighted. In
- versions of EPM prior to 5.50, the value was the color used to highlight the
- text. In 5.50 and above, the text is highlighted by having a circle drawn
- around it, and the actual value used for HIGHLIGHT_COLOR is irrelevant.
-
- The default value for HIGHLIGHT_COLOR is that it is not set.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.41. HOSTCOPYDRIVE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set HOSTCOPYDRIVE in MYCNF.E to specify the drive letter used to indicate the
- host session to the HOSTCOPY command. This lets you change the HOSTDRIVE and
- the HOSTCOPYDRIVE independently.
-
- Note: If HOST_SUPPORT is set to 'EMUL'. then HOSTCOPYDRIVE should only contain
- a drive letter. If HOST_SUPPORT is set to (or defaults to) 'STD', then
- HOSTCOPYDRIVE should contain a drive letter followed by a colon.
-
- The default value for HOSTCOPYDRIVE is 'H' or 'H:'. It should not be changed.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.42. HOSTCOPYOPTIONS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set HOSTCOPYOPTIONS in MYCNF.E to specify options that should be included as
- part of the HOSTCOPY command if HOST_SUPPORT is set to (or defaults to) 'STD'.
- If HOST_SUPPORT is set to 'EMUL'. then my_FTOPTIONS and my_BINOPTIONS are used
- instead.
-
- The default value for HOSTCOPYOPTIONS is the null string.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.43. HOSTDRIVE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set HOSTDRIVE in MYCNF.E to specify what drive letter should be used to
- represent the host when HOST_SUPPORT is set to (or defaults to) 'STD'.
-
- The default value for HOSTDRIVE is 'H:'. (The trailing colon is required.)
- Users who have a real H: drive on their machine might want to set it to some
- other value - for example, 'V:' to represent VM files.
-
- Related configuration constants:
-
- my_HOSTDRIVE (for E3EMUL users)
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.44. HOSTDRIVE_REQUIRED ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set HOSTDRIVE_REQUIRED in MYCNF.E to specify that the host drive letter is
- required when editing host files using HOST_SUPPORT='EMUL'. Normally, E3EMUL
- will attempt to figure out whether the argument of an Edit command is a host
- file or a workstation file; if it is ambiguous, it will be assumed to represent
- a host file.
-
- The default value for HOSTDRIVE_REQUIRED is 0. Possible values are:
-
- 0 Assume that ambiguous strings not containing a drive specifier represent
- host files.
-
- 1 Don't assume that a file is a host file unless the host drive letter is
- given explicitly.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.45. HOST_LT_REQUIRED ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set HOST_LT_REQUIRED in MYCNF.E to specify that a logical terminal ID is
- required when editing host files using HOST_SUPPORT='EMUL'. This lets users
- with a local H: drive use H: to refer to the local drive, and HA: to refer to
- the host session (LT A).
-
- The default value for HOST_LT_REQUIRED is 0 Possible values are:
-
- 0 Don't require the LT.
-
- 1 Require the LT.
-
- Related configuration constants:
-
- my_HOSTDRIVE
- HOSTDRIVE_REQUIRED
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.46. HOST_SUPPORT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set HOST_SUPPORT in MYCNF.E to specify the type of support included in EPM for
- editing files that reside on a VM or MVS host. In order to load or save a host
- file, you must be logged on to the host through Communications Manager.
-
- The default value for HOST_SUPPORT is 'STD' when compiling EPM.E, or '' when
- compiling SMALL.E. Possible values are:
-
- 'STD' Use the standard host support method, SAVELOAD.E. This only supports a
- single VM host session, and requires an external file transfer program
- (such as Almcopy). It does not support Communication Manager's Send /
- Receive.
-
- 'EMUL' Use the enhanced host support method, E3EMUL.E. This supports multiple
- host sessions (logical terminals), both VM and MVS files, Send / Receive,
- and is the most flexible.
-
- 'SRPI' Use the enhanced host support method, SLSRPI.E. This supports multiple
- VM host sessions, and is the fastest file transfer method (since files
- are loaded and saved directly between the workstation's memory and the
- host disk, rather than going through a temporary file on the
- workstations's disk). The drawback is that a SRPI server must be running
- on the host in order to load or save files. SLSRPI.E and the required
- SRPI servers are available in the LaMail22 package within IBM, and are
- not currently available externally.
-
- '' Use SLNOHOST.E and omit host support entirely.
-
- Related configuration constants:
-
- LINK_HOST_SUPPORT
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.47. INCLUDE_MATHLIB ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set INCLUDE_MATHLIB in MYCNF.E to specify whether the bulk of the MATH-related
- commands are included in the base .ex file or linked separately when needed.
-
- The default value for INCLUDE_MATHLIB is 0. Possible values are:
-
- 0 Omit most of the support; dynamically link MATHLIB.EX when any of MATH,
- MATHX, MATHO, ADD, or MULT are entered.
-
- 1 Include the MATHLIB support in the base .ex file.
-
- Note: The value of INCLUDE_MATHLIB is ignored if EXTRA_EX is 1; in this case,
- EXTRA_EX will include all of MATH.E.
-
- Related configuration constants:
-
- WANT_MATH
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.48. INCLUDE_MENU_SUPPORT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set INCLUDE_MENU_SUPPORT in MYCNF.E to specify whether or not support for the
- EPM action bar is included.
-
- The default value for INCLUDE_MENU_SUPPORT is 1. Possible values are:
-
- 0 Omit support
-
- 1 Include support
-
- Note: This would only be set by someone providing their own action bar, either
- in the macro language or by using the E Toolkit.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.49. INCLUDE_WORKFRAME_SUPPORT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set INCLUDE_WORKFRAME_SUPPORT in MYCNF.E to specify whether the commands sent
- from the IBM Workframe/2 should be defined in EPM.
-
- The default value for INCLUDE_WORKFRAME_SUPPORT is 1. Possible values are:
-
- 0 Omit support
-
- 1 Include support
-
- Note: Compiler support is only included if bookmark support is included.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.50. I_LIKE_A_SEMICOLON_SUPPLIED_AFTER_DEFAULT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set I_LIKE_A_SEMICOLON_SUPPLIED_AFTER_DEFAULT in MYCNF.E to specify that a
- semicolon should be supplied after a DEFAULT statement when expanding a SWITCH
- statement with C syntax assist active.
-
- The default value for I_LIKE_A_SEMICOLON_SUPPLIED_AFTER_DEFAULT is 0. Possible
- values are:
-
- 0 Don't add a semicolon.
-
- 1 Add a line containing a semicolon after inserting the line containing the
- DEFAULT statement.
-
- Related configuration constants:
-
- C_SYNTAX_ASSIST
- MY_EXPAND_ON
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.51. I_LIKE_MY_CASES_UNDER_MY_SWITCH ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set I_LIKE_MY_CASES_UNDER_MY_SWITCH in MYCNF.E to specify whether the CASE
- statement should be aligned under the SWITCH when expanding a SWITCH statement
- with C syntax assist active.
-
- The default value for I_LIKE_MY_CASES_UNDER_MY_SWITCH is 1. Possible values
- are:
-
- 0 Indent the CASE statement.
-
- 1 Align the CASE statement with the SWITCH statement.
-
- Related configuration constants:
-
- C_SYNTAX_ASSIST
- MY_EXPAND_ON
- SYNTAX_INDENT
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.52. KEEP_CURSOR_ON_SCREEN ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set KEEP_CURSOR_ON_SCREEN in MYCNF.E to specify whether the cursor should be
- allowed to scroll off the visible portion of the edit window.
-
- The default value for KEEP_CURSOR_ON_SCREEN is 1. Possible values are:
-
- 0 Conform to CUA, and don't change the line the cursor is on when scrolling
- with the scroll bars. If the cursor is scrolled off the screen, then
- pressing any key that moves the cursor will cause the screen to jump so
- that the cursor is once again visible.
-
- 1 When scrolling with the scroll bars, keep the cursor at the same
- screen-relative position.
-
- Note: This option is only supported for EPM version 5.60 or above.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.53. KEYWORD_HELP_INDEX_FILE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set KEYWORD_HELP_INDEX_FILE in MYCNF.E to specify the name of the index file(s)
- used for providing keyword help.
-
- The default value for KEYWORD_HELP_INDEX_FILE is 'epmkwhlp.ndx'. The value can
- be a single filename or a list of filenames separated by plus signs. For
- example,
-
- const
- KEYWORD_HELP_INDEX_FILE = 'epmkwhlp.ndx+epmtech.ndx+dde4.ndx'
-
- Each file listed will be searched for in the current directory, EPMPATH, DPATH,
- EPM.EXE's directory, and PATH (in that order).
-
- Note: The value compiled in will be overridden by the value of the environment
- variable HELPNDX if it is set in your environment.
-
- Related configuration constants:
-
- WANT_KEYWORD_HELP
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.54. LINK_HOST_SUPPORT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set LINK_HOST_SUPPORT in MYCNF.E to specify that the support for editing host
- files is to be linked separately. This can be used if there is no other way to
- fit everything you need into your EPM.EX, but it is not recommended since the
- separate file contains support for loading and saving workstation files as well
- as host files; if you have a problem with the separate .ex file, you won't be
- able to edit anything.
-
- The default value for LINK_HOST_SUPPORT is 0. Possible values are:
-
- 0 Include host support in the base .ex file.
-
- 1 Include host support in a separate .ex file that will dynamically be
- linked at run time. This is only supported for HOST_SUPPORT set to
- 'EMUL' or 'SRPI'.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.55. LOCAL_MOUSE_SUPPORT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set LOCAL_MOUSE_SUPPORT in MYCNF.E to include support for local mouse
- definitions. A local mouse definition is one that applies to a single file,
- rather than to all files in the ring. Since the default macros don't take
- advantage of this, you would only set this to 1 if you were writing your own
- mouse macros. (See the description of register_mousehandler in EPMTECH.INF.)
-
- The default value for LOCAL_MOUSE_SUPPORT is 0. Possible values are:
-
- 0 Omit local mouse support.
-
- 1 Include local mouse support.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.56. MAINFILE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set MAINFILE in MYCNF.E to specify the name of the macro file to be compiled by
- the ETPM command if no argument is specified.
-
- The default value for MAINFILE is 'epm.e'.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.57. MARKCOLOR ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set MARKCOLOR in MYCNF.E to specify the color in which marked (selected) text
- should be displayed.
-
- The default value for MARKCOLOR is Blue + GreyB.
-
- Note: The value set in the MYCNF.E can be overridden by the value set in the
- Colors page of the Settings dialog.
-
- Note: Must follow a DEFINE, not a CONST.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.58. MENU_LIMIT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set MENU_LIMIT in MYCNF.E to include a Ring entry on the action bar that lists
- each file in the edit ring. The value of MENU_LIMIT is the number of files
- that will be included in the Ring pulldown. If more than this many files are in
- the ring, the (MENU_LIMIT + 1) entry will be More..., which will bring up a
- listbox. One exception - if you set this to 0, there will be no Ring pulldown;
- instead, a List ring entry will be added to the Options pulldown. This means
- that adding files to or removing them from the ring will be faster.
-
- The default value for MENU_LIMIT is 0.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.59. MESSAGECOLOR ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set MESSAGECOLOR in MYCNF.E to specify the color for the message line, and for
- error messages displayed when the message line is hidden.
-
- The default value for MESSAGECOLOR is Light_Red + WhiteB.
-
- Note: The value set in the MYCNF.E can be overridden by the value set in the
- Colors page of the Settings dialog.
-
- Note: Must follow a DEFINE, not a CONST.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.60. MODIFIED_MARKCOLOR ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set MODIFIED_MARKCOLOR in MYCNF.E to specify the color in which marked text
- should be displayed in a modified file when SHOW_MODIFY_METHOD is set to
- 'COLOR'.
-
- The default value for MODIFIED_MARKCOLOR is Blue + WhiteB.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.61. MODIFIED_WINDOWCOLOR ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set MODIFIED_WINDOWCOLOR in MYCNF.E to specify the color in which unmarked text
- should be displayed in a modified file when SHOW_MODIFY_METHOD is set to
- 'COLOR'.
-
- The default value for MODIFIED_WINDOWCOLOR is White + BlueB. Possible values
- are:
-
- 0 Omit support
-
- 1 Include support
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.62. MOUSE_SUPPORT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set MOUSE_SUPPORT in MYCNF.E to specify whether or not mouse support should be
- included in the base .ex file.
-
- The default value for MOUSE_SUPPORT is 1. Possible values are:
-
- 0 Omit mouse support completely.
-
- 1 Include mouse support in EPM.EX (or in EXTRA.EX if EXTRA_EX is 1).
-
- 'LINK' Dynamically link MOUSE.EX at run time (if EXTRA_EX is 0; if EXTRA_EX is
- 1, then MOUSE.E will be included in EXTRA.EX).
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.63. MVS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set MVS in MYCNF.E to specify whether support for editing files on an MVS host
- should be included; this only applies when HOST_SUPPORT is set to 'EMUL'.
-
- The default value for MVS is 0. Possible values are:
-
- 0 Omit MVS support.
-
- 1 Include MVS support.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.64. MY_ADDENDA_FILENAME ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set MY_ADDENDA_FILENAME in MYCNF.E to specify the name of the dictionary
- addenda file to be used when spell checking a file.
-
- The default value for MY_ADDENDA_FILENAME is 'c:\lexam\lexam.adl'.
-
- Note: The value set in the MYCNF.E can be overridden by the value set in the
- Paths page of the Settings dialog.
-
- Related configuration constants:
-
- SPELL_SUPPORT
- ADDENDASUPPORT
- CHECK_FOR_LEXAM
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.65. MY_APPNAME ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set MY_APPNAME in MYCNF.E to specify the name of the application in the EPM.INI
- file (or LAM.INI for LaMail) under which configuration information will be
- saved.
-
- The default value for MY_APPNAME is the first 3 characters of the .ex search
- path name (i.e., 'EPM' for EPM and 'LAM' for LaMail).
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.66. MY_BINOPTIONS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set MY_BINOPTIONS in MYCNF.E to specify the default file transfer options that
- should be used when loading or saving host binary files if HOST_SUPPORT is set
- to 'EMUL'. If HOST_SUPPORT is set to (or defaults to) 'STD', then
- HOSTCOPYOPTIONS is used instead.
-
- The default value for MY_BINOPTIONS is dependant on the value for USING; see
- E3EMUL.E.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.67. MY_CENTER_SEARCH ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set MY_CENTER_SEARCH in MYCNF.E to specify the initial value for the predefined
- universal variable CENTER_SEARCH, which controls the position of the cursor
- after a successful Locate or repeat_find (Ctrl+F) operation.
-
- The default value for MY_CENTER_SEARCH is 1. Possible values are:
-
- 0 Cursor moves to target string; if target is before or after the text in
- the window, the cursor moves to the first or last line of the edit window
- (respectively).
-
- 1 Target string is centered vertically in the edit window.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.68. MY_CUA_MARKING_SWITCH ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set MY_CUA_MARKING_SWITCH in MYCNF.E to specify the initial value for the
- CUA_marking_switch flag when WANT_CUA_MARKING is set to 'SWITCH'.
-
- The default value for MY_CUA_MARKING_SWITCH is 0. Possible values are:
-
- 0 Start out in Advanced Marking mode.
-
- 1 Start out in the more limited CUA-compatible mode.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.69. MY_CUA_MENU_ACCEL ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set MY_CUA_MENU_ACCEL in MYCNF.E to specify the initial value for the
- CUA_menu_accel flag when BLOCK_ACTIONBAR_ACCELERATORS is set to 'SWITCH'.
-
- The default value for MY_CUA_MENU_ACCEL is 0. Possible values are:
-
- 0 Start out with the CUA accelerators blocked, so the EPM-defined actions
- will be performed.
-
- 1 Start out with the CUA accelerator definitions in effect.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.70. MY_DEFAULT_EDIT_OPTIONS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set MY_DEFAULT_EDIT_OPTIONS in MYCNF.E to give an initial value for the
- DEFAULT_EDIT_OPTIONS universal variable, which is used as default options by
- the Edit command. These default options can be overridden by options given with
- any particular edit command. For example, if you normally don't want tabs to
- be expanded to spaces when loading a file, you could include in your MYCNF.E:
-
- const
- my_DEFAULT_EDIT_OPTIONS = '/t'
- If you then did want to expand tabs for one file, you could enter the command:
-
- e /nt myfile
-
- The default value for MY_DEFAULT_EDIT_OPTIONS is the null string.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.71. MY_DEFAULT_SAVE_OPTIONS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set MY_DEFAULT_SAVE_OPTIONS in MYCNF.E to give an initial value for the
- DEFAULT_SAVE_OPTIONS universal variable, which is used as default options by
- the Save command. These default options can be overridden by options given with
- any particular save command. For example, if you normally want trailing spaces
- to be stripped off when saving a file, you could include in your MYCNF.E:
-
- const
- my_DEFAULT_SAVE_OPTIONS = '/s'
- If you then did want to strip spaces for one file, you could enter the command:
-
- s /nt myfile
-
- The default value for MY_DEFAULT_SAVE_OPTIONS is the null string.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.72. MY_DEFAULT_SEARCH_OPTIONS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set MY_DEFAULT_SEARCH_OPTIONS in MYCNF.E to give an initial value for the
- DEFAULT_SEARCH_OPTIONS universal variable, which is used as default options by
- the Locate and Change commands. These default options can be overridden by
- options given with any particular locate or changecommand. For example, if you
- normally want searches to be case insensitive, you could include in your
- MYCNF.E:
-
- const
- my_DEFAULT_SEARCH_OPTIONS = 'c'
- If you then wanted to find a string where case mattered, you could enter the
- command:
-
- l /BiCapital/ e
-
- The default value for MY_DEFAULT_SEARCH_OPTIONS is the null string.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.73. MY_DICTIONARY_FILENAME ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set MY_DICTIONARY_FILENAME in MYCNF.E to specify the name of the dictionary
- file to be used when spell checking a file.
-
- The default value for MY_DICTIONARY_FILENAME is 'c:\lexam\us.dct'. You can list
- multiple dictionaries, separated by spaces.
-
- const
- my_DICTIONARY_FILENAME = 'us.dct legal.dct medical.dct'
-
- Note: The value set in the MYCNF.E can be overridden by the value set in the
- Paths page of the Settings dialog.
-
- Related configuration constants:
-
- SPELL_SUPPORT
- CHECK_FOR_LEXAM
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.74. MY_EXPAND_ON ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set MY_EXPAND_ON in MYCNF.E to specify the initial value for the EXPAND_ON flag
- which determines whether syntax expansion will be performed automatically.
-
- The default value for EXPAND_ON is 1. It can be changed at run time by use of
- the EXPAND command. Possible values are:
-
- 0 Don't automatically provide syntax assist.
-
- 1 Expand all known keywords automatically.
-
- Related configuration constants:
-
- ALTERNATE_KEYSETS
- C_SYNTAX_ASSIST
- E_SYNTAX_ASSIST
- P_SYNTAX_ASSIST
- REXX_SYNTAX_ASSIST
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.75. MY_EXTRA_EX_NAME ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set MY_EXTRA_EX_NAME in MYCNF.E to specify the name used for the extra .ex file
- linked when EXTRA_EX is 1. This can be useful when you want to create multiple
- sets of .ex files and want to avoid naming conflicts. For example, LaMail uses
- 'LAMEXTRA'.
-
- The default value for MY_EXTRA_EX_NAME is 'EXTRA'
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.76. MY_FTOPTIONS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set MY_FTOPTIONS in MYCNF.E to specify the default file transfer options that
- should be used when loading or saving host text files if HOST_SUPPORT is set to
- 'EMUL'. If HOST_SUPPORT is set to (or defaults to) 'STD', then HOSTCOPYOPTIONS
- is used instead.
-
- The default value for MY_FTOPTIONS is dependant on the value for USING; see
- E3EMUL.E.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.77. MY_HOSTCMD ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set MY_HOSTCMD in MYCNF.E to specify the method to be used for sending commands
- to the host if HOST_SUPPORT is set to 'EMUL'. This is meant for use by
- user-written applications; it is not used by the distributed macros.
-
- The default value for MY_HOSTCMD is dependant on the value for USING; see
- E3EMUL.E. If USING is set to 'IBM', then the default is 'EHLLAPI', which uses
- the included EHLLAPI support to write to the host screen. All other methods
- require an external program, which is not included with the EPM package.
-
- Related configuration constants:
-
- USE_EHLLAPI
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.78. MY_HOSTCOPY ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set MY_HOSTCOPY in MYCNF.E to specify the command used for copying files
- between the host and the workstation.
-
- The default value for MY_HOSTCOPY is 'almcopy'
-
- Related configuration constants:
-
- HOST_SUPPORT
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.79. MY_HOSTDRIVE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set MY_HOSTDRIVE in MYCNF.E to specify what drive letter should be used to
- represent the host when HOST_SUPPORT is set to 'EMUL'.
-
- The default value for my_HOSTDRIVE is 'H'. (Note: No trailing colon is
- allowed.) Users who have a real H: drive on their machine might want to set it
- to some other value - for example, 'V' to represent VM files.
-
- Related configuration constants:
-
- HOSTDRIVE (for SAVELOAD.E users)
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.80. MY_JOIN_AFTER_WRAP ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set MY_JOIN_AFTER_WRAP in MYCNF.E to specify whether text that wraps from one
- line should be joined with the following line. See Join After Wrap for an
- example.
-
- The default value for MY_JOIN_AFTER_WRAP is 1. Possible values are:
-
- 0 Join the wrapped text with the next line.
-
- 1 Place the wrapped text on its own line.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.81. MY_KEEP_TEMP_FILES ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set MY_KEEP_TEMP_FILES in MYCNF.E to specify if temporary files should be saved
- after editing is completed when HOST_SUPPORT is set to 'EMUL'. (Host file
- editing is done by copying the host file to a temporary file on the
- workstation, and then loading that file into the editor.)
-
- The default value for MY_KEEP_TEMP_FILES is 0. Possible values are:
-
- 0 Erase temporary files after successfully loading or saving the host file
-
- 1 Preserve the temporary files.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.82. MY_LT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set MY_LT in MYCNF.E to specify the default logical terminal to be used for
- loading or saving host files when HOST_SUPPORT is set to 'EMUL'.
-
- The default value for MY_LT is 'A'
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.83. MY_MATCHTAB_ON ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set MY_MATCHTAB_ON in MYCNF.E to set the initial value used for MATCHTAB.
-
- The default value for MY_MATCHTAB_ON is 0. Possible values are:
-
- 0 Start with MATCHTAB off.
-
- 1 Start with MATCHTAB on.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.84. MY_MENU_PROMPT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set MY_MENU_PROMPT in MYCNF.E to specify the initial value for menu prompting
- if WANT_DYNAMIC_PROMPTS is set to 1.
-
- The default value for MY_MENU_PROMPT is 1. Possible values are:
-
- 0 Start out without dynamic prompts.
-
- 1 Start out with dynamic prompts.
-
- Note: The value set in the MYCNF.E will be overridden by the value saved in
- the .INI file if the user selects Options / Save Options
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.85. MY_MOUSESTYLE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set MY_MOUSESTYLE in MYCNF.E to choose the default mouse behavior in Advanced
- Marking mode.
-
- The default value for MY_MOUSESTYLE is 1. Possible values are:
-
- 1 Drag button 1 for block mark, Ctrl+MB1 for character mark.
-
- 2 Drag button 1 for character mark, Ctrl+MB1 for block mark.
-
- Related configuration constants:
-
- WANT_CUA_MARKING
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.86. MY_PRINTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set MY_PRINTER in MYCNF.E to specify the device ('LPT1', 'COM1', etc.) to be
- used for the default printer. This can also be a LAN printer (e.g.,
- '\\server\printq') The default printer is used when the Print command is given
- without specifying an argument, or (if ENHANCED_PRINT_SUPPORT is 0,) when Print
- is selected from the File or Edit menu.
-
- If no value for MY_PRINTER is set, then the device associated with the printer
- listed in OS2SYS.INI under application PM_SPOOLER, key PRINTER will be used.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.87. MY_REXX_PROFILE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set MY_REXX_PROFILE in MYCNF.E to specify whether a Rexx profile will be called
- if WANT_PROFILE is set to 'SWITCH'.
-
- The default value for MY_REXX_PROFILE is 0. Possible values are:
-
- 0 Don't call PROFILE.ERX.
-
- 1 Call PROFILE.ERX.
-
- Note: The value set in the MYCNF.E will be overridden by the value saved in
- the .INI file if the user selects Options / Save Options The Profile
- command can be used to change this dynamically in order to save a new value.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.88. MY_RING_ENABLED ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set MY_RING_ENABLED in MYCNF.E to specify whether the ring (support of multiple
- files) will be turned on or off at startup if RING_OPTIONAL is set to 1.
-
- The default value for MY_RING_ENABLED is 1. Possible values are:
-
- 0 Start out with the ring disabled.
-
- 1 Start out with the ring enabled.
-
- Note: The value set in the MYCNF.E will be overridden by the value saved in
- the .INI file if the user selects Options / Save Options
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.89. MY_SAVEPATH ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set MY_SAVEPATH in MYCNF.E to specify the directory to which intermediate files
- should be written when transferring files between the host and the workstation
- if HOST_SUPPORT='EMUL'.
-
- If no value for MY_SAVEPATH is given, the SAVEPATH defaults to the
- AUTOSAVE_PATH
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.90. MY_SAVE_WITH_TABS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set MY_SAVE_WITH_TABS in MYCNF.E to specify that the /t option should always be
- given when saving a file. This is equivalent to setting my_DEFAULT_SAVE_OPTIONS
- to '/t'.
-
- The default value for MY_SAVE_WITH_TABS is 0. Possible values are:
-
- 0 Don't save with tabs
-
- 1 Always convert multiple spaces to tabs when saving.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.91. MY_SCRIPT_FILE_TYPE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set MY_SCRIPT_FILE_TYPE in MYCNF.E to specify an additional filetype
- (extension) which will be considered to be a SCRIPT file when spell checking
- the file. When spell checking a SCRIPT file, then SCRIPT variables and markup
- are checked for and ignored. The file types normally considered SCRIPT files
- are 'SCR', 'SCT', 'SCRIPT', and 'IPF'.
-
- The default value for MY_SCRIPT_FILE_TYPE is that it is not set.
-
- Related configuration constants:
-
- SPELL_SUPPORT
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.92. MY_SHOW_LONGNAMES ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set MY_SHOW_LONGNAMES in MYCNF.E to set the initial value for the
- SHOW_LONGNAMES flag when WANT_LONGNAMES is set to 'SWITCH'.
-
- The default value for MY_SHOW_LONGNAMES is 0. Possible values are:
-
- 0 Don't display the .LONGNAME extended attribute.
-
- 1 Display the .LONGNAME on the title bar.
-
- Note: The value set in the MYCNF.E will be overridden by the value saved in
- the .INI file if the user selects Options / Save Options The Longnames
- command can be used to change this dynamically in order to save a new value.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.93. MY_STAY ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set MY_STAY in MYCNF.E to set the initial value for the STAY flag when SETSTAY
- is set to '?'.
-
- The default value for MY_STAY is 0. Possible values are:
-
- 0 After a Change, leave the cursor on the last changed string.
-
- 1 After a Change, preserve the original position of the cursor.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.94. MY_STREAM_MODE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set MY_STREAM_MODE in MYCNF.E to set the initial value for the STREAM_MODE flag
- when WANT_STREAM_MODE is set to 'SWITCH'.
-
- The default value for MY_STREAM_MODE is 1 if ENTER_ACTION is set to 'STREAM',
- or 0 otherwise. Possible values are:
-
- 0 Start out in line mode.
-
- 1 Start out in stream mode.
-
- Note: The value set in the MYCNF.E will be overridden by the value saved in
- the .INI file if the user selects Options / Save Options
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.95. MY_TWO_SPACES ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set MY_TWO_SPACES in MYCNF.E to initialize the TWO_SPACES universal variable,
- which controls whether one or two spaces are left after a period, question
- mark, exclamation point or colon when reflowing text.
-
- The default value for MY_TWO_SPACES is 1. Possible values are:
-
- 0 Leave only one space.
-
- 1 Leave two spaces.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.96. NLS_LANGUAGE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set NLS_LANGUAGE in MYCNF.E to
-
- The default value for NLS_LANGUAGE is 'english'. The following languages are
- available separately in the EPMMRI package:
-
- 'DANSK'
- 'DEUTSCH'
- 'ESPANOL'
- 'FRANCAIS'
- 'ITALIANO'
- 'NL'
- 'NORSK'
- 'PORTUGAL'
- 'SUOMI'
- 'SV'
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.97. NO_DUPLICATE_BOOKMARKS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set NO_DUPLICATE_BOOKMARKS in MYCNF.E to disallow duplicate bookmark names.
- Duplicate bookmarks are useful if you want to access them using the Next and
- Previous Bookmark operations rather than by name, and so don't want to bother
- giving them unique names. This can be confusing to some people, however,
- because although all the names will be listed in the bookmark list, selecting
- any of them will go to the same place in the file. Also, deleting any of the
- bookmarks with a given name from the list will result in none of them being
- listed (although they will still be able to be accessed by Next and Previous).
-
- The default value for NO_DUPLICATE_BOOKMARKS is 0. Possible values are:
-
- 0 Allow duplicate bookmarks.
-
- 1 Don't allow duplicate bookmarks.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.98. NO_ESCAPE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set NO_ESCAPE in MYCNF.E to prevent the Escape key from activating the command
- line dialog.
-
- The default value for NO_ESCAPE is 0. Possible values are:
-
- 0 Escape key will activate command dialog.
-
- 1 Only Ctrl+I will activate the command dialog.
-
- Related configuration constants:
-
- TOGGLE_ESCAPE
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.99. PROCESSNAME_CMD ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set PROCESSNAME_CMD in MYCNF.E to specify the command executed after mouse
- button 2 is double-clicked on the title bar and the user presses Enter.
-
- The default value for PROCESSNAME_CMD is 'name'.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.100. PROOF_DIALOG_FIXED ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set PROOF_DIALOG_FIXED in MYCNF.E to specify that the Proof dialog always
- appear in a fixed location.
-
- The default value for PROOF_DIALOG_FIXED is 0. Possible values are:
-
- 0 The Proof dialog will appear under the word being proofed.
-
- 1 The Proof dialog will appear to the right of the edit window.
-
- Note: This specifies where EPMLEX.E asks to have the proof dialog placed; if
- this would result in part of the dialog being off the screen, the dialog
- will automatically be shifted appropriately. This might result in the
- dialog covering the word being proofed.
-
- Related configuration constants:
-
- SPELL_SUPPORT
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.101. P_MARGINS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set P_MARGINS in MYCNF.E to to specify what the margins should be when editing
- Pascal files if P_SYNTAX_ASSIST is enabled.
-
- The default value for P_MARGINS is 1 MAXMARGIN 1, where MAXMARGIN is one less
- than the maximum length of a line. (MAXMARGIN is 254 for EPM versions prior to
- 5.60.) You can specify any valid margins, or set to 0 to indicate that no
- special margins should be set for Pascal files.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.102. P_SYNTAX_ASSIST ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set P_SYNTAX_ASSIST in MYCNF.E to control whether syntax assist for the Pascal
- language is included.
-
- The default value for P_SYNTAX_ASSIST is 1. Possible values are:
-
- 0 Omit support
-
- 1 Include support
-
- Related configuration constants:
-
- ALTERNATE_KEYSETS
- MY_EXPAND_ON
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.103. P_TABS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set P_TABS in MYCNF.E to set the default tabs setting for Pascal files.
-
- The default value for P_TABS is 3. You can specify any valid tabs setting, or
- set to 0 to indicate that no special tabs should be set for Pascal files.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.104. RECEIVE_CMD ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set RECEIVE_CMD in MYCNF.E to specify the command to be used to receive a file
- from the host when HOST_SUPPORT is 'EMUL' and USING is 'CP78'.
-
- The default value for RECEIVE_CMD is 'receive'.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.105. RESPECT_CASE_FOR_ADDENDA ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set RESPECT_CASE_FOR_ADDENDA in MYCNF.E to specify whether words added to the
- addenda dictionary should have their case preserved.
-
- The default value for RESPECT_CASE_FOR_ADDENDA is 1. Possible values are:
-
- 0 Translate all words to lower case before adding them to the addenda.
-
- 1 Add words as they appeared in the document.
-
- Related configuration constants:
-
- SPELL_SUPPORT
- ADDENDASUPPORT
- CHECK_FOR_LEXAM
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.106. RESTORE_MARK_AFTER_SORT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set RESTORE_MARK_AFTER_SORT in MYCNF.E to specify whther the mark should be
- restored after sorting.
-
- The default value for RESTORE_MARK_AFTER_SORT is 1. Possible values are:
-
- 0 Leave the sorted text unmarked.
-
- 1 Restore the mark after sorting.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.107. REXX_MARGINS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set REXX_MARGINS in MYCNF.E to to specify what the margins should be when
- editing Rexx files if REXX_SYNTAX_ASSIST is enabled.
-
- The default value for REXX_MARGINS is 1 MAXMARGIN 1, where MAXMARGIN is one
- less than the maximum length of a line. (MAXMARGIN is 254 for EPM versions
- prior to 5.60.) You can specify any valid margins, or set to 0 to indicate that
- no special margins should be set for Rexx files.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.108. REXX_SYNTAX_ASSIST ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set REXX_SYNTAX_ASSIST in MYCNF.E to control whether syntax assist for the Rexx
- language is included.
-
- The default value for REXX_SYNTAX_ASSIST is 1. Possible values are:
-
- 0 Omit support
-
- 1 Include support
-
- Related configuration constants:
-
- ALTERNATE_KEYSETS
- MY_EXPAND_ON
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.109. REXX_TABS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set REXX_TABS in MYCNF.E to set the default tabs setting for Rexx files.
-
- The default value for REXX_TABS is 3. You can specify any valid tabs setting,
- or set to 0 to indicate that no special tabs should be set for Rexx files.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.110. RING_OPTIONAL ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set RING_OPTIONAL in MYCNF.E to specify whether or not EPM should pretend to be
- able to only edit a single file at a time. Note that EPM can always edit
- multiple files; this merely controls how easy it is to do so.
-
- The default value for RING_OPTIONAL is 0. Possible values are:
-
- 0 Don't hide the presence of the edit ring.
-
- 1 Allow the hiding of the ring.
-
- Related configuration constants:
-
- MY_RING_ENABLED
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.111. RUNTIME ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set RUNTIME in MYCNF.E to specify whether various commands should be defined
- for changing variable values at runtime if HOST_SUPPORT is 'EMUL'.
-
- The default value for RUNTIME is 0. Possible values are:
-
- 0 Omit runtime support.
-
- 1 Include runtime support.
-
- The runtime commands are:
-
- EM Change the emulator being used.
-
- LT Change the default logical terminal.
-
- HD Change the HOSTDRIVE drive letter.
-
- SAVEPATH Change the directory being used for the SAVEPATH.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.112. SEND_CMD ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set SEND_CMD in MYCNF.E to specify the command to be used to send a file to the
- host when HOST_SUPPORT is 'EMUL' and USING is 'CP78'.
-
- The default value for SEND_CMD is 'send'.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.113. SETSTAY ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set SETSTAY in MYCNF.E to determine which is to be the current line after a
- Change command.
-
- The default value for SETSTAY is 0. Possible values are:
-
- 0 Cursor will be positioned on the last occurrence of the string in the
- file.
-
- 1 The original position of the cursor will not be changed.
-
- '?' A STAY command will be defined so you can change between the above two
- behaviors at run time.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.114. SHIFT_BLOCK_ONLY ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set SHIFT_BLOCK_ONLY in MYCNF.E to control what is shifted by the Ctrl+F7 and
- Ctrl+F8 keys.
-
- The default value for SHIFT_BLOCK_ONLY is 0. Possible values are:
-
- 0 Shift all text to the right of the left edge of the block, ignoring the
- right edge of the block
-
- 1 Shift only the contents of the block, truncating what is shifted past the
- right edge, and adding blanks at the right edge of the block when
- shifting to the left.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.115. SHOW_MODIFY_METHOD ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set SHOW_MODIFY_METHOD in MYCNF.E to specify what indication should be given
- that the current file has been modified.
-
- The default value for SHOW_MODIFY_METHOD is ''. Possible values are:
-
- '' Don't do anything special; the word "Modified" will appear on the
- status line when the file is modified if using the default
- STATUS_TEMPLATE.
-
- 'COLOR' Indicate by changing the color of the text. Modified files will have
- unmarked text displayed in MODIFIED_WINDOWCOLOR instead of TEXTCOLOR,
- and marked text displayed in MODIFIED_MARKCOLOR instead of MARKCOLOR.
-
- 'TITLE' Indicate by appending a string (default '(mod)') to the filename
- displayed on the title bar.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.116. SHOW_MODIFY_TEXT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set SHOW_MODIFY_TEXT in MYCNF.E to specify the string that should be added to
- the title bar when the file has been modified, if SHOW_MODIFY_METHOD is set to
- 'TITLE'.
-
- The default value for SHOW_MODIFY_TEXT is ' (mod)'.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.117. SMARTFILE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set SMARTFILE in MYCNF.E to specify whether the File key (F4) should just quit
- if the file has not been modified.
-
- The default value for SMARTFILE is 0. Possible values are:
-
- 0 Pressing F4 will always do a Save and Quit.
-
- 1 Pressing F4 if there were no changes made will only Quit.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.118. SMARTSAVE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set SMARTSAVE in MYCNF.E to specify whether the user should be warned when
- pressing the Save key (F2) in a file that hasn't had any changes made to it.
-
- The default value for SMARTSAVE is 0. Possible values are:
-
- 0 Pressing F2 will always do a Save.
-
- 1 Pressing F2 if there were no changes made will give a message saying that
- the file has not been modified, and bring up the command line with a Save
- command in it. The user can then press Enter to save the file anyway, or
- Esc to cancel.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.119. SORT_TYPE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set SORT_TYPE in MYCNF.E to specify the type of sort command desired.
-
- The default value for SORT_TYPE is 'DLL'. Possible values are:
-
- '' Omit support for the Sort command.
-
- 'DLL' Define the Sort command to use a sort routine defined in a DLL; this is
- fast, but can sort up to a limit of 64k of data because the text to be
- sorted is passed in a buffer.
-
- 'E' Define the Sort command to use a sort routine defined in the E language.
- This is slower than the DLL code, but has no size limit.
-
- XXX (any other string) Will attempt to include a user-written SortXXX.E
- file, which might call a user-supplied sort routine. Samples are
- available that call various IBM Internal Use Only utilities.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.120. SPELL_SUPPORT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set SPELL_SUPPORT in MYCNF.E to specify if and how the spell checking support
- should be included.
-
- The default value for SPELL_SUPPORT is 'DYNALINK' Possible values are:
-
- 0 Omit spell-checking support.
-
- 1 Include support in the base .ex file.
-
- 'LINK' Link the separately-compiled EPMLEX.EX file automatically at
- startup time.
-
- 'DYNALINK' Link the separately-compiled EPMLEX.EX file automatically the first
- time the user attempts to do a spell check.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.121. STATUSCOLOR ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set STATUSCOLOR in MYCNF.E to specify in what color the status line should be
- displayed.
-
- The default value for STATUSCOLOR is Black + WhiteB.
-
- Note: The value set in the MYCNF.E can be overridden by the value set in the
- Colors page of the Settings dialog.
-
- Note: Must follow a DEFINE, not a CONST.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.122. STATUS_TEMPLATE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set STATUS_TEMPLATE in MYCNF.E to specify what should be displayed on the EPM
- status line. The template is a character string of up to 128 characters. The
- string can contain an assortment of characters and status tags. These tags
- instruct EPM what to insert into the final status line string.
-
- A status tag consists of two characters; '%' followed by a legal status item
- character. Defined status tags are as follows:
-
- %A Autosave count value (number of changes made to the file since the last
- autosave)
- %C current Column number
- %F number of Files in ring (followed by the word "File" or "Files")
- %I Insert or replace state (cursor status)
- %L current Line number
- %M Modified status (if the file has been modified)
- %S total number of lines in the current file
- %X displays the hexadecimal value of the current character
- %Z displays the ASCII value of the current character
-
- The default value if STATUS_TEMPLATE is not defined is 'Line %l of %s Column
- %c %i %m %f'
-
- Note: Previous versions of EPM used a .STATUSLINE field which allowed macro
- writers to set a different status line for each file in the ring. This
- was wasteful, since space had to be allocated for the status line for
- every file. Now, instead of a .STATUSLINE field, there is a global
- status line whose value is set using the SETSTATUSLINE command (defined
- in STDCTRL.E). Users wishing to have a different status line depending
- on the file can call SETSTATUSLINE from a DEFSELECT. See the EPM
- Technical Reference for details.
-
- Examples: Example 1:
-
- STATUS_TEMPLATE = 'L= %l, C= %c'
-
- Given the above constant and your cursor on line 100, column 3. The following
- status line will be produced:
-
- L= 100, C= 3
- Example 2:
-
- STATUS_TEMPLATE = 'Total Lines = %S Row %l Col %c Char<%z> mode=%i'
-
- Given the above constant, your cursor on line 100, column 3, your cursor is
- below the letter 'A', and the cursor is in insert mode. The following status
- line will be produced:
-
- Total Lines = 1015 Row 100 Col 3 Char<65> mode=Insert
- Example 3:
-
- STATUS_TEMPLATE = Line %l of %s Col %c %i %m Asc. %z=x'%x' %f
- If the cursor is on the digit 0, this will produce a status line like:
-
- Line 1 of 1234 Col 13 Replace Modified Asc. 48=x'30' 5 Files
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.123. SUPPORT_BOOK_ICON ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set SUPPORT_BOOK_ICON in MYCNF.E to specify whether or not the Book icon entry
- should appear on the Options menu.
-
- The default value for SUPPORT_BOOK_ICON is 1. Possible values are:
-
- 0 Omit Book icon
-
- 1 Include Book icon
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.124. SUPPORT_TECHREF ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set SUPPORT_TECHREF in MYCNF.E to specify whether or not the View Technical
- Reference entry should appear on the Help menu.
-
- The default value for SUPPORT_TECHREF is 0. Possible values are:
-
- 0 Omit View Technical Reference
-
- 1 Include a View Technical Reference selection that will call VIEW to look
- at the file EPMTECH.INF.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.125. SUPPORT_USER_EXITS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set SUPPORT_USER_EXITS in MYCNF.E to specify whether or not "hooks" for calling
- user exits should be included. If included, the exits will be checked for and,
- if present, called, at editor startup (where the command line arguments can be
- examined and modified), when the name of the file being edited is changed,
- before and after saving a file, and when quitting a file. For additional
- information on the exits, including the paramaters passed, users should refer
- to The EPM Editor Technical Reference.
-
- The default value for SUPPORT_USER_EXITS is 0. Possible values are:
-
- 0 Omit support for user exits.
-
- 1 Include support for user exits.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.126. SUPPORT_USERS_GUIDE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set SUPPORT_USERS_GUIDE in MYCNF.E to specify whether or not the View User's
- Guide entry should appear on the Help menu.
-
- The default value for SUPPORT_BOOK_ICON is 0. Possible values are:
-
- 0 Omit View User's Guide
-
- 1 Include a View User's Guide selection that will call VIEW to look at the
- file EPMUSERS.INF.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.127. SYNTAX_INDENT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set SYNTAX_INDENT in MYCNF.E to specify how many spaces blocks should be
- indented when using syntax assist.
-
- The default value for SYNTAX_INDENT is 3.
-
- Related configuration constants:
-
- ALTERNATE_KEYSETS
- C_SYNTAX_ASSIST
- E_SYNTAX_ASSIST
- P_SYNTAX_ASSIST
- REXX_SYNTAX_ASSIST
- MY_EXPAND_ON
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.128. TEMP_FILENAME ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set TEMP_FILENAME in MYCNF.E to specify the (fully-qualified) name of a
- temporary file that will be used for various commands. This should point to the
- fastest drive you have (a VDISK is ideal). If no drive or directory is
- specified, and a temporary path is set in the Paths page of the Settings
- dialog, then that path will be attached to the file name.
-
- The default value for TEMP_FILENAME is 'e.tmp'.
-
- Note: This constant is used to initialize a universal variable that is used
- wherever a single temporary file is needed. The universal variable can
- be modified at run time if desired. MYSTUFF.SMP (in the standard set of
- E_MACROS) contains sample code that sets the variable according to the
- value of an environment variable which points to a VDISK.
-
- Related configuration constants:
-
- TEMP_PATH
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.129. TEMP_PATH ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set TEMP_PATH in MYCNF.E to specify the path where temporary files should be
- placed. This should point to the fastest drive you have (a VDISK is ideal). If
- a value is given, a trailing backslash must be supplied.
-
- The default value for TEMP_PATH is '' (the current directory).
-
- Note: This constant is used to initialize a universal variable that is used
- wherever more than one temporary file is needed. The universal variable
- can be modified at run time if desired. MYSTUFF.SMP (in the standard set
- of E_MACROS) contains sample code that sets the variable according to
- the value of an environment variable which points to a VDISK.
-
- Note: The value set in the MYCNF.E can be overridden by the value set in the
- Paths page of the Settings dialog.
-
- Related configuration constants:
-
- TEMP_FILENAME
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.130. TEXTCOLOR ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set TEXTCOLOR in MYCNF.E to specify the color in which unmarked text in the
- edit window should be displayed.
-
- The default value for TEXTCOLOR is Black + WhiteB.
-
- Note: The value set in the MYCNF.E can be overridden by the value set in the
- Colors page of the Settings dialog.
-
- Note: Must follow a DEFINE, not a CONST.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.131. TOGGLE_ESCAPE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set TOGGLE_ESCAPE in MYCNF.E to specify whether an ESCAPEKEY command should be
- defined.
-
- The default value for TOGGLE_ESCAPE is 0. Possible values are:
-
- 0 Omit ESCAPEKEY
-
- 1 Define ESCAPEKEY
-
- Related configuration constants:
-
- NO_ESCAPE
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.132. TOGGLE_TAB ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set TOGGLE_TAB in MYCNF.E to specify whether a TABKEY command is defined.
-
- The default value for TOGGLE_TAB is 0. Possible values are:
-
- 0 Omit TABKEY
-
- 1 Define the TABKEY command
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.133. TOP_OF_FILE_VALID ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set TOP_OF_FILE_VALID in MYCNF.E to specify whether or not the user should be
- allowed to position the cursor on line 0 (the Top of File line).
-
- The default value for TOP_OF_FILE_VALID is 1. Possible values are:
-
- 0 Don't allow the cursor on line 0.
-
- 1 Allow the cursor on line 0.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.134. TRASH_TEMP_FILES ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set TRASH_TEMP_FILES in MYCNF.E to specify whether or not temporary files
- should be allowed to be quit without warning the user. (A file whose filename
- begins with a period, like '.DIR', is assumed to be a temporary file.)
-
- The default value for TRASH_TEMP_FILES is 0. Possible values are:
-
- 0 Don't treat temporary files any differently.
-
- 1 When quitting a temporary file, don't present the Quitting file dialog if
- the file was modified; just throw away the changes.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.135. UNDERLINE_CURSOR ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set UNDERLINE_CURSOR in MYCNF.E to specify that you want the AVIO-style
- underline cursor rather than the GPI-style vertical bar.
-
- The default value for UNDERLINE_CURSOR is 0. Possible values are:
-
- 0 Insert-mode cursor is a vertical bar to the left of the current
- character; replace-mode cursor is a block the height and width of the
- current character.
-
- 1 Replace-mode cursor is a horizontal line below the baseline of the
- current character; insert-mode cursor is a block the width and half the
- height of the current character.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.136. UNMARK_AFTER_MOVE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set UNMARK_AFTER_MOVE in MYCNF.E to specify that an unmark operation should be
- performed after a mark is moved with the Alt+M key or via the Edit menu.
-
- The default value for UNMARK_AFTER_MOVE is 0. Possible values are:
-
- 0 Leave the mark, so the marked text can be copied or moved again.
-
- 1 Remove the mark, so a new mark can be started.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.137. USE_ANSI_C_NOTATION ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set USE_ANSI_C_NOTATION in MYCNF.E to control how the template for MAIN is
- created using the C syntax assist.
-
- The default value for USE_ANSI_C_NOTATION is 1. Possible values are:
-
- 0 the declarations for argc, argv and envp will be entered as separate
- statements.
-
- 1 the declarations will be included as part of the function's argument
- list.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.138. USE_APPEND ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set USE_APPEND in MYCNF.E to specify that files passed to the edit command
- without a path should be searched for along the DPATH if not found in the
- current directory. (This gives an effect similar to the DOS APPEND command.)
-
- The default value for USE_APPEND is 0. Possible values are:
-
- 0 Use filenames as given.
-
- 1 If an unqualified filename is given and it is not found in the current
- directory, check the DPATH for it.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.139. USE_EHLLAPI ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set USE_EHLLAPI in MYCNF.E to specify whether Send and Receive should be called
- directly to transfer files between the workstation and the host, or whether
- they should be called via EHLLAPI. Communication Manager's Send & Receive don't
- work from inside a PM program, so we call them via EHLLAPI. The FTTERM and
- PMFTERM versions do work (and EHLLAPI does not), so we let the user override
- the default.
-
- The default value for USE_EHLLAPI is 1. Possible values are:
-
- 0 Call Send and Receive directly.
-
- 1 Use EHLLAPI calls to invoke Send and Receive.
-
- Note: This is only relevant if HOST_SUPPORT is set to 'EMUL' and USING is set
- to 'IBM'.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.140. USING ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set USING in MYCNF.E to specify the file transfer protocol to be used when
- HOST_SUPPORT is set to 'EMUL'.
-
- The default value for USING is 'IBM'. Possible values are:
-
- 'CM' Communications Manager, using ALMCOPY.
-
- 'CP78' CP78 (the CUT-mode emulator)
-
- 'CM+CP78' Both of the above, when using multiple 3270 adapters. HA:, HB:, etc.
- will go to CM on adapter 1; H2: will go to CP78 on adapter 2.
-
- 'IBM' Send / Receive protocol, as used by CM, FTTERM, PMFTERM, etc.
-
- Related configuration constants:
-
- USE_EHLLAPI
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.141. VALID_LTS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set VALID_LTS in MYCNF.E to specify what characters will be considered as
- representing valid logical terminals when HOST_SUPPORT is set to 'EMUL'.
-
- The default value for VALID_LTS is dependant on the value for USING; see
- E3EMUL.E.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.142. VANILLA ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set VANILLA in MYCNF.E to omit all other MY*.E files when compiling. This can
- be useful when debugging problems, to determine whether the problem is with the
- base set of macros (as configured by your MYCNF.E) or with user-written code in
- other MY*.E files.
-
- The default value for VANILLA is 0. Possible values are:
-
- 0 Include all the normal MY*.E files.
-
- 1 Compile a "vanilla" .ex file, omitting all user-written code.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.143. VM ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set VM in MYCNF.E to specify whether support should be included for editing
- files on a VM host when HOST_SUPPORT is set to 'EMUL'.
-
- The default value for VM is 1. Possible values are:
-
- 0 Omit support for VM files.
-
- 1 Include support.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.144. WANT_ALL ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set WANT_ALL in MYCNF.E to specify whether or not the ALL command should be
- included in the base .ex file.
-
- The default value for WANT_ALL is 0. Possible values are:
-
- 0 Omit ALL command.
-
- 1 Include ALL command.
-
- Note: ALL can be compiled and used separately; it need not be included in the
- base .ex file.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.145. WANT_APPLICATION_INI_FILE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set WANT_APPLICATION_INI_FILE in MYCNF.E to specify whether or not support for
- accessing the application .ini file (e.g., EPM.INI) is included. People
- building an E Toolkit application using the base EPM macros might want to set
- this to 0; EPM users should leave it as 1.
-
- The default value for WANT_APPLICATION_INI_FILE is 1. Possible values are:
-
- 0 Omit support.
-
- 1 Include support.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.146. WANT_BOOKMARKS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set WANT_BOOKMARKS in MYCNF.E to specify whether bookmark support should be
- included.
-
- The default value for WANT_BOOKMARKS is 'LINK' Possible values are:
-
- 0 Omit bookmark support
-
- 1 Include bookmark support in EPM.EX (or in EXTRA.EX if EXTRA_EX is 1).
-
- 'LINK' Dynamically link BOOKMARK.EX at run time (if EXTRA_EX is 0; if EXTRA_EX
- is 1, then BOOKMARK.E will be included in EXTRA.EX).
-
- Note: BOOKMARK.E includes support for bookmarks, for IBM's Workframe/2
- product, and for loading and saving attributes in an Extended Attribute.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.147. WANT_BRACE_BELOW_STATEMENT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set WANT_BRACE_BELOW_STATEMENT in MYCNF.E to specify whether braces should
- appear on the same line as the statement or on the following line during syntax
- assist expansion.
-
- The default value for WANT_BRACE_BELOW_STATEMENT is 0. Possible values are:
-
- 0 The brace will appear to the right of the statement.
-
- if () {
- } else {
- } /* endif */
-
- 1 The brace will appear below the statement.
-
- if ()
- {
- }
- else
- {
- } /* endif */
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.148. WANT_BRACKET_MATCHING ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set WANT_BRACKET_MATCHING in MYCNF.E to specify whether the bracket-matching
- code in ASSIST.E should be included.
-
- The default value for WANT_BRACKET_MATCHING is 0. Possible values are:
-
- 0 Omit support
-
- 1 Include support; pressing Ctrl+[ will move the cursor to the matching
- parenthesis ('()'), bracket ('[]'), brace ('{}'), or angle bracket('<>').
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.149. WANT_CHAR_OPS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set WANT_CHAR_OPS in MYCNF.E to omit support for character marking, if you're
- trying to save space.
-
- The default value for WANT_CHAR_OPS is 1. Possible values are:
-
- 0 Omit support.
-
- 1 Include support.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.150. WANT_CUA_MARKING ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set WANT_CUA_MARKING in MYCNF.E to specify whether you want CUA-style marking
- or the more powerful EPM marking.
-
- The default value for WANT_CUA_MARKING is 0. Possible values are:
-
- 0 Use the normal EPM marking ("Advanced marking").
-
- 1 Use the CUA-style marking.
-
- 'SWITCH' Support both marking styles, and allow the user to change back and
- forth between them (via an entry on the Preferences selection of the
- Options menu).
-
- Related configuration constants:
-
- MY_CUA_MARKING_SWITCH
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.151. WANT_DBCS_SUPPORT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set WANT_DBCS_SUPPORT in MYCNF.E to specify whether the macros should include
- support for Double Byte Character Sets.
-
- The default value for WANT_DBCS_SUPPORT is 0. Possible values are:
-
- 0 Omit DBCS support.
-
- 1 Include DBCS support.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.152. WANT_DM_BUFFER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set WANT_DM_BUFFER in MYCNF.E to specify whether all deleted marks should be
- saved in a buffer for later recovery
-
- The default value for WANT_DM_BUFFER is 0. Possible values are:
-
- 0 Omit support
-
- 1 Include support; a Recover mark delete entry will appear on the Edit
- menu.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.153. WANT_DOSUTIL ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set WANT_DOSUTIL in MYCNF.E to omit DOSUTIL.E if you are tight on space. The
- commands affected include QDATE, QTIME, DIR, SET, VOL, PATH, DPATH and OS2.
-
- The default value for WANT_DOSUTIL is '?'. Possible values are:
-
- 0 Omit DOSUTIL.E.
-
- 1 Include DOSUTIL.E.
-
- '?' Include DOSUTIL.E if found; don't warn the user if it's not.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.154. WANT_DRAW ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set WANT_DRAW in MYCNF.E to omit support for the DRAW command.
-
- The default value for WANT_DRAW is 'F6' Possible values are:
-
- 0 Omit support for the DRAW command.
-
- 1 Include support for the DRAW command.
-
- 'F6' Include support for the DRAW command, and define F6 to invoke it.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.155. WANT_DYNAMIC_PROMPTS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set WANT_DYNAMIC_PROMPTS in MYCNF.E to specify whether support for dynamic menu
- prompting is included. This refers to the display of a prompt on the message
- line whenever a menu item is selected, describing what that menu item does. If
- support is included, the presentation of the prompts can be toggled on or off
- dynamically (via a Prompting entry on the Frame Controls pull-right menu of the
- Options menu).
-
- The default value for WANT_DYNAMIC_PROMPTS is 1. Possible values are:
-
- 0 Omit support.
-
- 1 Include support.
-
- Related configuration constants:
-
- MY_MENU_PROMPT
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.156. WANT_EBOOKIE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set WANT_EBOOKIE in MYCNF.E to specify whether support for EBOOKIE should be
- included.
-
- The default value for WANT_EBOOKIE is 'DYNALINK'. Possible values are:
-
- 0 Omit support.
-
- 1 Include BKEYS.E in EPM.EX (or in EXTRA.EX if EXTRA_EX is set to 1).
-
- 'LINK' always link BKEYS.EX at startup.
-
- 'DYNALINK' Include support for EBOOKIE in the base macros, but don't try to
- link BKEYS.EX. EBOOKIE support will be activated when BKEYS is
- linked, either explicitly (LINK BKEYS) or implicitly (BOOKIE ON).
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.157. WANT_EPM_SHELL ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set WANT_EPM_SHELL in MYCNF.E to specify whether support should be included for
- the EPM shell window.
-
- The default value for WANT_EPM_SHELL is 0. Possible values are:
-
- 0 Omit support.
-
- 1 Include support.
-
- 'HIDDEN' Include support, but hide it from the Command menu until the first
- time the user enters a Shell command.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.158. WANT_ET_COMMAND ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set WANT_ET_COMMAND in MYCNF.E to specify whether support for the ETPM command
- should be included.
-
- The default value for WANT_ET_COMMAND is 1. Possible values are:
-
- 0 Omit support.
-
- 1 Include support.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.159. WANT_GET_ENV ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set WANT_GET_ENV in MYCNF.E to specify whether the Get_env() routine should be
- defined in DOSUTIL.E. The routine will be defined if either WANT_GET_ENV or
- USE_APPEND are set to 1. The EPATH and OPATH commands will only be defined if
- both the Get_Env() and Search_path() routines are defined. You can also set
- WANT_GET_ENV to 1 if you want to call Get_Env() from your own routines.
-
- The default value for WANT_GET_ENV is 1. Possible values are:
-
- 0 Omit the routine.
-
- 1 Include the routine.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.160. WANT_KEYWORD_HELP ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set WANT_KEYWORD_HELP in MYCNF.E to specify whether support for getting help
- for a keyword is included.
-
- The default value for WANT_KEYWORD_HELP is 0. Possible values are:
-
- 0 Omit support.
-
- 1 Include support.
-
- KEYWORD_HELP_INDEX_FILE
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.161. WANT_LAN_SUPPORT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set WANT_LAN_SUPPORT in MYCNF.E to specify whether the LOCK and UNLOCK commands
- are defined.
-
- The default value for WANT_LAN_SUPPORT is 0. Possible values are:
-
- 0 Omit support.
-
- 1 Include support.
-
- Note: In previous versions, the file locking support was done completely in
- the macros. Starting with EPM version 5.51, we have internal support
- for file locking. Therefore, files can be locked using the Edit /k
- option regardless of the setting of WANT_LAN_SUPPORT.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.162. WANT_LONGNAMES ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set WANT_LONGNAMES in MYCNF.E to specify whether support for long names should
- be included. See the Longnames command for a description of what this does.
-
- The default value for WANT_LONGNAMES is 0. Possible values are:
-
- 0 Omit support.
-
- 1 Include support.
-
- 'SWITCH' Include support, and define a Longnames command to let you turn it on
- and off at runtime.
-
- Related configuration constants:
-
- MY_SHOW_LONGNAMES
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.163. WANT_MATH ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set WANT_MATH in MYCNF.E to optionally omit MATH.E if space is needed. The
- commands affected are MATH, MATHX, MATHO, ADD, and MULT.
-
- The default value for WANT_MATH is '?'. Possible values are:
-
- 0 Omit MATH.E.
-
- 1 Include MATH.E.
-
- '?' Include MATH.E if found; don't warn the user if it's not.
-
- Related configuration constants:
-
- INCLUDE_MATHLIB
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.164. WANT_NODISMISS_MENUS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set WANT_NODISMISS_MENUS in MYCNF.E to specify whether the Preferences and
- Frame Controls pull-right menus under the Options menu will be dismissed as
- soon as something is selected, or whether they should stay up until explicitly
- dismissed.
-
- The default value for WANT_NODISMISS_MENUS is 1. Possible values are:
-
- 0 The above-mentioned menus will disappear as soon as anything is selected
-
- 1 The above-mentioned menus will remain active as long as only selections
- that can have check marks are toggled.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.165. WANT_PROFILE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set WANT_PROFILE in MYCNF.E to specify whether a PROFILE.ERX should be called
- if one exists.
-
- The default value for WANT_PROFILE is 0. Possible values are:
-
- 0 Don't check for a Rexx profile.
-
- 1 Check for a Rexx profile whenever a new edit window is created, and
- execute it if found.
-
- 'SWITCH' Define a Profile command to allow turning this on and off
- dynamically.
-
- Related configuration constants:
-
- MY_REXX_PROFILE
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.166. WANT_SEARCH_PATH ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set WANT_SEARCH_PATH in MYCNF.E to specify whether the Search_path() routine
- should be defined in DOSUTIL.E. The routine will be defined if either
- WANT_SEARCH_PATH or USE_APPEND are set to 1. The EPATH and OPATH commands will
- only be defined if both Search_path() and Get_Env() routines are defined. You
- can also set WANT_SEARCH_PATH to 1 if you want to call Search_path() from your
- own routines.
-
- The default value for WANT_SEARCH_PATH is 0. Possible values are:
-
- 0 Omit the routine.
-
- 1 Include the routine.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.167. WANT_STACK_CMDS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set WANT_STACK_CMDS in MYCNF.E to specify whether the stack commands (PushMark,
- PopMark, SwapMark, PushPos, PopPos, and SwapPos) are defined.
-
- The default value for WANT_STACK_CMDS is 0. Possible values are:
-
- 0 Omit the commands.
-
- 1 Define the commands.
-
- 'SWITCH' Define the commands and add an entry to the Preferences cascade on
- the Options menu which allows selecting whether or not the commands
- will be included in the Edit menu.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.168. WANT_STREAM_MODE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set WANT_STREAM_MODE in MYCNF.E to specify whether support for emulating a
- stream mode editor should be included.
-
- The default value for WANT_STREAM_MODE is 0. Possible values are:
-
- 0 Omit stream mode support.
-
- 1 Use only stream mode.
-
- 'SWITCH' Include support for both stream and line mode, and enable switching
- back and forth at runtime.
-
- Related configuration constants:
-
- MY_STREAM_MODE
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.3.169. WANT_TAGS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Set WANT_TAGS in MYCNF.E to specify whether tags file support should be
- included.
-
- The default value for WANT_TAGS is 0. Possible values are:
-
- 0 Omit tags file support
-
- 1 Include tags file support in EPM.EX (or in EXTRA.EX if EXTRA_EX is 1).
-
- 'LINK' Dynamically link TAGS.EX at run time (if EXTRA_EX is 0; if EXTRA_EX is
- 1, then TAGS.E will be included in EXTRA.EX).
-
- Note: This option is only supported for EPM version 5.60 or above. See the EPM
- 5.60 / 6.00 online help for a description of what tags files are.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.4. Changing the Default Color Scheme ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- The default color configuration can be changed. The default colors are defined
- in the bottom half of the file COLORS.E.
-
- o Defines mnemonic constants for the color numbers, so the rest of the files
- can refer to "RED" rather than 4.
- o Configures the standard colors, by defining mnemonic field names such as
- STATUSCOLOR.
-
- The following is a listing of the defined colors in EPM:
-
- Foreground Colors Background Colors
- ----------------- -----------------
- BLACK = 00 BLACKB = 00
- BLUE = 01 BLUEB = 16
- GREEN = 02 GREENB = 32
- CYAN = 03 CYANB = 48
- RED = 04 REDB = 64
- MAGENTA = 05 MAGENTAB = 80
- BROWN = 06 BROWNB = 96
- LIGHT_GREY = 07 LIGHT_GREYB =112
- DARK_GREY = 08 DARK_GREYB =128
- LIGHT_BLUE = 09 LIGHT_BLUEB =144
- LIGHT_GREEN = 10 LIGHT_GREENB =160
- LIGHT_CYAN = 11 LIGHT_CYANB =176
- LIGHT_RED = 12 LIGHT_REDB =192
- LIGHT_MAGENTA = 13 LIGHT_MAGENTAB =208
- YELLOW = 14 YELLOWB =224
- WHITE = 15 WHITEB =240
- BLINK = 128
-
- You can override the standard colors by defining the appropriate constant in
- your MYCNF.E. See the configuration constants DRAGCOLOR, MARKCOLOR,
- MESSAGECOLOR, STATUSCOLOR, and TEXTCOLOR.
-
- MYCNF.SMP includes an example of customizing your colors.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.5. Insert Mode ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- The default insert/replace mode is set in a line which looks like:
-
- set insert_state 1 /* default setting */
- set insert_state 0 /* if you prefer replace mode */
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.6. EOF Mode ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- The default is that when loading a file, EPM will stop reading at the first EOF
- (End-Of-File) character it encounters at the end of a line, and when saving a
- file, it will write an EOF character at the end of the file. If you set EOF to
- 0, then when loading a file, EPM will read the file until the very end, and
- keep any EOF characters it encounters (except if the last character in the file
- is an EOF). When saving a file with EOF set to 0, EPM will not append an EOF
- character to the end.
-
- set EOF 1 /* Respect EOF characters */
- set EOF 0 /* Treat EOF like text */
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.7. Join After Wrap ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- When you type a word beyond the right margin EPM will perform automatic word
- wrap; the word will be moved to the next line. In addition, if you're in insert
- mode, EPM will join the next line to the wrapped word in an attempt to keep the
- paragraph flowing together. To illustrate:
-
- This is a test paragraph. Set narrow margins,
- like 'ma 1 45', go into insert mode, and type
- characters into this line to cause a word wrap.
- (sample next line)
- If you follow the instructions you'll end up with a joined-after-wrap last
- line:
-
- wrap. (sample next line)
-
- This behavior is useful if you're typing plain text, but can be annoying in a
- SCRIPT document where the next line can contain non-text tags. The
- join-after-wrap feature can be turned off with the configuration constant
- MY_JOIN_AFTER_WRAP
-
- Note that setting join_after_wrap is a simple assignment which can be done
- anywhere in the macros. Power users might like to set the option to 0 for
- SCRipt files, but 1 for all other file types. Typically this would be done in
- MYSELECT.E (see the section Including New Features into the Default
- Configuration for more details):
-
- defselect
- join_after_wrap = filetype()<>'SCR'
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16.8. Enter Key Behavior ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- You can easily configure the way the Enter and Ctrl-Enter keys work by setting
- the ENTER_ACTION and C_ENTER_ACTION constants in MYCNF.E, or allow dynamic
- changing of all the Enter key variations by setting the ENHANCED_ENTER_KEYS
- constant. The default action for the Enter key is to insert a new line, and the
- default action for the Ctrl+Enter key is to move to the beginning of the next
- line.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 17. Changing the Default Window Layout ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Note: In the current release, the Options pulldown includes a Save Options
- Setting entry, which will save the current font and the status (on or off) of
- the status line, message line, and scroll bars. Once you save them (in your
- OS2.INI), EPM will set them to the same state every time an edit window is
- opened. This is an easier way of configuring than the following, if you don't
- need to recompile the macros for any other reason.
-
- The Options pulldown contains some window features you can change. If you would
- prefer for the editor to start with them different from the defaults, you can
- change them in your MYMAIN.E file. These items include the size of the font
- used, whether the status line, message line, and scroll bars should be
- displayed.
-
- If you prefer to have the status line off when starting EPM, add the following
- line to MYMAIN.E:
-
- 'togglecontrol 7' -- Toggle the status line
-
- If you prefer to have the message line on when starting EPM, add the following
- line to MYMAIN.E:
-
- 'togglecontrol 8' -- Toggle the message line
-
- If you prefer to have the scroll bars off when starting EPM, add the following
- line to MYMAIN.E:
-
- 'setscrolls' -- Toggle the scroll bars
-
- If you want to have one on and one off, add one of the following:
-
- 'togglecontrol 9' -- Toggle the vertical scroll bar
- 'togglecontrol 10' -- Toggle the horizontal scroll bar
-
- If you would like to maximize the window whenever EPM creates a new edit
- window, then add the following code to MYMAIN.E:
-
- call dynalink( 'PMWIN',
- 'WINSETWINDOWPOS',
- gethwnd(6) ||
- atoi(0) || atoi(3) || -- HWND_TOP
- atoi(0) ||
- atoi(0) ||
- atoi(0) ||
- atoi(0) ||
- atoi(2048)) -- SWP_MAXIMIZE
- or:
-
- call windowsize1(0, 0, 0, 0, 2048)
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18. Recompiling Your Editor ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- How to recompile EPM macros.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.1. Compiling Macros ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- To compile the macros, issue this command from the OS/2 system prompt:
-
- ETPM EPM
- Use 'EPMPATH' to specify the directory containing EPM macros. If you haven't
- already done so, create an EPMPATH environment variable. For example, add the
- following to your CONFIG.SYS file:
-
- SET EPMPATH=d:\EDIT\EPM;d:\EDIT\EMACROS;d:\EDIT\MYMACROS;
- This assumes that you have a directory called EDIT which contains the following
- subdirectories: EPM, EMACROS, and MYMACROS. In this case, you will need to
- recompile as described above. EPM searches the following directories for data
- files (e.g. .E and .HLP files):
-
- 1. the current directory, and then in
-
- 2. the directories specified by the EPMPATH environment variable (if it is
- defined), and then
-
- 3. the directories specified by the DPATH environment variable, and then
-
- 4. the same directory as the editor's translator program (ETPM.EXE).
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.1.1. Using the RELINK, LINK, UNLINK and ETPM commands ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- A macro source file (ie. a .E file) must be compiled into a EPM executable file
- (ie. a .EX file). If EPM is already in memory, then the new .EX file must be
- loaded (LINKed) into EPM. Whenever EPM tries to load a new .EX file, it first
- checks to see if it is already loaded into some edit window. If it is, EPM
- checks if the file on disk is newer than the one in memory. If the dates are
- the same, the copy in memory is shared. If not, EPM will load the new .ex file.
- This means that even though you can't unlink the base .ex file (EPM.EX), you
- can recompile it and any new edit windows you open will use the new EPM.EX,
- while any existing edit windows will be unaffected. The commands that allow you
- to compile macro files are:
-
- ETPM filename This will compile the E macro source file
- specified in filename into a .EX file. The new
- .EX file will not be loaded into version of EPM
- currently loaded into memory, and thus will not
- be immediately available for use. If no filename
- is specified, the MAINFILE (default EPM.E; see
- the MAINFILEconfiguration constant) will be used.
- LINK filename This will load the .EX file specified by filename
- into the copy of EPM residing in memory. It will
- not, however, recompile the .E source file.
- RELINK filename This will compile the .E file specified by
- filename into an EPM executable .EX file and load
- the file into the copy of EPM that currently
- resides in memory. If no filename is specified,
- the current file being edited will be used; if
- modified, it will be saved before being compiled.
- UNLINK filename This will remove a previously linked .EX file
- specified by filename from the version of EPM
- that currently resides in memory. This is useful
- to save memory when space is at a premium.
-
- For example, create a file called TEST.E containing the following command
- definition:
-
- defc hello=
- messageNwait("Hello, world!")
- You can keep the file in an open window for further changes (in fact this is
- advisable because EPM will move the cursor to the location of any mistakes if
- the file being compiled exists in the current ring).
-
- Now press the ESCape key to bring up the command line dialog box. Type:
-
- relink
- The current filename and .E extension will automatically be appended to the
- relink command. Alternatively, you could have issued the following commands:
-
- etpm test
- link test
- If the compiler reported an error, edit TEST.E and correct any typos. Once your
- macro compiles correctly, try the new command HELLO. Issue the following in the
- command line dialog box:
-
- hello
- A dialog box should appear with the message "Hello, world" in it.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.2. Saving Memory and Macro Complexity with the Smaller Macro Set ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- There is an extra file distributed with the editor package called SMALL.E. This
- may be used as a replacement for EPM.E. You will save about 17k of memory at
- the expense of losing syntax-directed editing, all math commands, host-file
- support, sorting, and the qdate/qtime commands. To activate the smaller
- definitions issue the command:
-
- ETPM small.e epm.ex
- from the OS/2 prompt. You may also compile it to some name other than EPM.EX,
- and thereafter load it only when desired with the /E command-line switch.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19. Return Codes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- This variable's value is set by all commands. It will contain one of the
- following error codes if the command did not succeed. It will contain 0 if the
- command did succeed. See the RC command for further information.
-
- RC Error strings RC Error strings
- ---- ----------------- ---- -----------------
- -2 File not found -270 Not enough memory
- -3 Path not found -271 Error in margin settings
- -4 Too many open files -272 Error in tab settings
- -5 Access denied -273 String not found
- -7 Memory control blocks -274 Unknown command
- -8 Insufficient memory -275 Missing filename
- -15 Invalid drive -276 Line too long to join
- -18 No more files -277 Too many files
- -19 Disk is write-protected -278 Lines truncated
- -20 Unknown unit -279 Text already marked
- -21 Drive not ready -280 Text not marked
- -22 Unknown command -281 Source destination conflict
- -23 Data error (CRC) -282 New file
- -24 Bad request structure length -283 Line mark required
- -25 Seek error -284 Error opening file
- -26 Unknown media type -285 Error writing file
- -27 Sector not found -286 Error reading file
- -28 Printer out of paper -287 Insufficient disk space
- -29 Write fault -288 Block mark required
- -30 Read fault -289 Too many rings
- -31 General failure -290 .ex file has incorrect version.
- Check EPM and ETPM versions
- -291 No main entry point
- -292 Error closing file
-
- -300 command line too long to shell
- -301 Cannot unlink module in use
- -302 Cannot unlink base keyset module
- -307 Link: file not found
- -308 Link: invalid filename
- -309 File already linked
- -310 Unlink: unknown module
- -311 Unlink: bad module filename
- -313 Call: unknown proc
- -314 Grep: memory error
- -315 Grep: missing [
- -316 Grep: bad range in [Alt-z]
- -317 Grep: empty []
- -318 Grep: regular expression too long
- -319 Dynalink: incorrect number of parameters
- -321 Cannot find keyset
- -322 Dynalink: unrecognized library name
- -323 Line number invalid or too large for file
- -324 Keyboard status failed
- -325 Buffer creation size too large
- -326 Dynalink: unrecognized procedure name
- -327 Too many keysets
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- The following operations can be performed from this dialog box:
-
- o A previously loaded file can be loaded by choosing from the list box.
- o A file can be loaded by typing the name of the file in the entry field. If
- the file entered does not exist then EPM will create it.
- o You can search for a file by pressing the File list... button which will open
- the File List dialog box.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- The file list dialog box is operated as follows:
-
- o If the file is in the current directory it can be loaded by choosing it from
- the File list box.
- o The directory can be changed using the Directory list box.
- o The current disk drive can be changed through the Drive combination list box.
- o The files listed can be constrained by selecting the applicable file type
- from the Type of file combination list box.
- o The name of the file can be typed in the Open filename entry field.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- If you have a separate Ring pulldown, then every time you add a file to the
- ring (with the Edit command) or remove a file from the ring (with the File or
- Quit command), the Ring pulldown will be rebuilt. This can be slow if you have
- many files in the ring. Also, the Ring pulldown is static, so it shows the ring
- starting from the file that was active the last time the pulldown was built.
- The List files in ring option is built dynamically every time it is called, so
- it always shows the contents of the ring starting with the current file.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- draft mode: the text will be printed in the default printer font, ignoring any
- and all font and size settings.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- NLS: National Language Support. As used in this document, it basically refers
- to the translation of text strings into other languages.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- WYSIWYG- What You See Is What You Get. The printed text will look exactly like
- the text on the screen, including font and size changes within the file.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- A modification refers to a single action, whether that action is typing a
- single character, deleting a section of marked text, or importing a large file
- - each counts as a single change.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- A word is defined as any contiguous sequence of non-blank characters. (Tabs and
- line-ends are treated as blanks for this purpose.)
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- Local Area Network
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- A block mark contains strictly rectangular area of text.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- A line mark is a mark in which the entire line from column 1 to column 255 is marked.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- A word mark contains only one word. Note that this is actually a special case
- of a block mark.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- A character mark is one which contains the stream of characters located between
- two points.
-
-
- ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
-
- An extended ASCII character can be passed as a command-line argument by
- entering a string which the command recognizes and translates to the actual
- internal representation. The string can be any of the following:
-
- a+x Alt+X, where 'x' is any alphabetic key.
-
- c+x Ctrl+X, where 'x' is any alphabetic key.
-
- Fn Function key N, where 'n' is 1 to 12.
-
- x+Fn shifted Function key N, where 'n' is 1 to 12, and 'x' can be 's' for the
- Shift key, 'a' for the Alt key, and 'c' for the Ctrl key.
-
- In the above, '+' can actually be '+', '-', or '_'.